Red Hat Training

A Red Hat training course is available for Red Hat Enterprise Linux

Installation Guide

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5

for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0

版 5.0

Logo

摘要

This Installation Guide documents relevant information regarding the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0

序​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​

歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide 。​​​​​​​
HTML 與​​​​​​​ PDF版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​:http://www.redhat.com/docs/.

注意

Although this manual reflects the most current information possible, read the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Release Notes for information that may not have been available prior to the documentation being finalized. The Release Notes can be found on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1, online at http://www.redhat.com/docs/, or in the /usr/share/doc/redhat-release-notes-5<variant>/ directory after installation, where <variant> is Server, Client, or Desktop.

1. 電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​:
一​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​專​​​​​​​門​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 32 位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ 64 位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ IBM System z 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​,同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ Kickstart,PXE 和​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2. 還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide is part of Red Hat's ongoing commitment to provide useful and timely support and information to Red Hat Enterprise Linux users.

2.1. 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​寶​​​​​​​貴​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​

If you spot a typo in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide, or if you have thought of a way to make this manual better, we would love to hear from you! Submit a report in Bugzilla (http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/) against the component Installation_Guide (Product: Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Version: 5.0).
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​善​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​盡​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​落​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​周​​​​​​​遭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

3. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ www.redhat.com/docs 下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,本​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 更​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
HTML 與​​​​​​​ PDF版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​:http://www.redhat.com/docs/.

注意

Although this manual reflects the most current information possible, read the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Release Notes for information that may not have been available prior to the documentation being finalized. The Release Notes can be found on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1, online at http://www.redhat.com/docs/, or in the /usr/share/doc/redhat-release-notes-5<variant>/ directory after installation, where <variant> is Server, Client, or Desktop.

部 I. x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 和​​​​​​​ Itanium 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​

Intel 和​​​​​​​ AMD 32-位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ 64-位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​礙​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

1.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 有​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ EFI(Extensible Firmware Interface)Shell。​​​​​​​
  2. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ ELILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

1.2. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ — EFI Shell

在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 有​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell 是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ EFI 協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​ DOS 的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ FAT16(VFAT)的​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell 也​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ edit, type, cp, rm 與​​​​​​​ mkdir,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ 符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ help。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell內​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ELILO。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​EFI的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​:
http://developer.intel.com/technology/efi/index.htm

1.2.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ — EFI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​

map 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ EFI 所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​, 當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
  1. LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)
  2. 在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ IDE 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
  3. 在​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ IDE 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
  4. 在​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
  5. 在​​​​​​​ IDE 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​
  6. 在​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
map
其​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ FAT16 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​, 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IDE 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,IDE 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI光​​​​​​​ 碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,map 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
Device mapping table   
	fs0  : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	fs1  : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	fs2  : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk0 : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)   
	blk1 : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk2 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)   
	blk3 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk4 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part2,Sig00000000)   
	blk5 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part3,Sig00000000)   
	blk6 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part3,Sig00000000)/HD(Part1,Sig725F7772)  
	blk7 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)   
	blk8 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)   
	blk9 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)
在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ fs 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ EFI 能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FAT16 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ blk 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ EFI 能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,fs0 為​​​​​​​ LS-120 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,fs1 為​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ fs2 為​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

1.2.2. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ — EFI 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ FAT16(VFAT)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ 已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ ELILO 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ (elilo.conf)。​​​​​​​elilo.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 2. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​

2.1. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

2.2. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​月​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​難​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 100% 相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

2.3. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer to 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​ before proceeding.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,OS/2 甚​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​x86,AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(/ 和​​​​​​​ swap)給​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(/、​​​​​​​/boot/efi/ 和​​​​​​​ swap)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​[1]」​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,或​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
If you are not sure that you meet these conditions, or if you want to know how to create free disk space for your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation, refer to 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​.

2.4. 您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

有​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​購​​​​​​​買​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.4.1. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​
If you can boot using the DVD/CD-ROM drive, you can create your own CD-ROM to boot the installation program. This may be useful, for example, if you are performing an installation over a network or from a hard drive. Refer to 節 2.4.2, “建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​” for further instructions.
USB pen drive
If you cannot boot from the DVD/CD-ROM drive, but you can boot using a USB device, such as a USB pen drive, the following alternative boot method is available:
欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​ DVD 或​​​​​​​ CD-ROM #1 /images/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ diskboot.img 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
dd if=diskboot.img of=/dev/sda
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ USB 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.4.2. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

isolinux(不​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​)現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
Copy the isolinux/ directory from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or CD #1 into a temporary directory (referred to here as <path-to-workspace>) using the following command:
cp -r <path-to-cd>/isolinux/ <path-to-workspace>
Change directories to the <path-to-workspace> directory you have created:
cd <path-to-workspace>
請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​:
chmod u+w isolinux/*
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​:
mkisofs -o file.iso -b isolinux.bin -c boot.cat -no-emul-boot \  
-boot-load-size 4 -boot-info-table -R -J -v -T isolinux/

注意

由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Burn the resulting ISO image (named file.iso and located in <path-to-workspace>) to a CD-ROM as you normally would.

2.5. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

Make sure an installation CD (or any other type of CD) is not in your system's CD/DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a CD in the drive may cause unexpected errors.
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ elilo 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​),輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
linux mediacheck

注意

在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /location/of/disk/space。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 公​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /export/directory。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/location/of/disk/space 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​創​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /var/isos 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/export/directory 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /var/www/html/rhel5。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Linux 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  • 請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​:
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
      dd if=/dev/dvd of=/location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso
      dvd 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ DVD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso
      cdrom 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ CD光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​X 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ 1 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.5.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,ISO 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
    在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso /export/directory/diskX/
    將​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ CD-ROM iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /var/isos/disk1.iso /var/www/html/rhel5-install/disk1/
下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.5.2. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ iso 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ NFS 輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mv /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/disk*.iso /export/directory/
請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ /etc/exports.這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
/export/directory client.ip.address(ro,no_root_squash)
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​:
/export/directory *(ro,no_root_squash)
啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ NFS 保​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs start指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs reload)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​ NFS 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.6. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ ext2、​​​​​​​ext3、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ FAT 等​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ reiserfs,則​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ ISO(或​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​龐​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(二​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ — 從​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso 
    dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​ — 將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​(許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Linux 機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ elilo 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​),輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
linux mediacheck
除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ updates.img 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ anaconda 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ anaconda RPM 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ install-methods.txt 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[1] 未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 3. System Specifications List

最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/。​​​​​​​
This system specifications list will help you keep a record of your current system settings and requirements. Enter the corresponding information about your system in the list provided below as a handy reference to help make your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation goes smoothly.
  • hard drive(s): type, label, size; e.g. IDE hda=40 GB
  • partitions: map of partitions and mount points; e.g. /dev/hda1=/home, /dev/hda2=/ (fill this in once you know where they will reside)
  • memory: amount of RAM installed on your system; e.g. 512 MB, 1 GB
  • CD-ROM: interface type; e.g. SCSI, IDE (ATAPI)
  • SCSI adapter: if present, make and model number; e.g. BusLogic SCSI Adapter, Adaptec 2940UW
  • network card: if present, make and model number; e.g. Tulip, 3COM 3C590
  • mouse: type, protocol, and number of buttons; e.g. generic 3 button PS/2 mouse, MouseMan 2 button serial mouse
  • monitor: make, model, and manufacturer specifications; e.g. Optiquest Q53, ViewSonic G773
  • video card: make, model number and size of VRAM; e.g. Creative Labs Graphics Blaster 3D, 8MB
  • sound card: make, chipset and model number; e.g. S3 SonicVibes, Sound Blaster 32/64 AWE
  • IP, DHCP, and BOOTP addresses
  • netmask
  • gateway IP address
  • one or more name server IP addresses (DNS)
  • domain name: the name given to your organization; e.g. example.com
  • hostname: the name of your computer; your personal choice of names; e.g. cookie, southpark
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​詞​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 4. 在​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

This chapter explains how to perform a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation from the DVD/CD-ROM, using the graphical, mouse-based installation program. The following topics are discussed:
  • Becoming familiar with the installation program's user interface
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​(語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
  • 完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

4.1. 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.

注意

If you are using an x86, AMD64, or Intel® 64 system, and you do not wish to use the GUI installation program, the text mode installation program is also available. To start the text mode installation program, use the following command at the boot: prompt:
linux text
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation instructions and obtain all needed information.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GUI 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
elilo linux text

4.1.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
These virtual consoles can be helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Messages displayed on the installation or system consoles can help pinpoint a problem. Refer to 表格 4.1, “主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​” for a listing of the virtual consoles, keystrokes used to switch to them, and their contents.
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​(虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ #6),除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

表格 4.1. 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​

主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​ 內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​
1 ctrl+alt+f1 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​
2 ctrl+alt+f2 shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​
3 ctrl+alt+f3 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​)
4 ctrl+alt+f4 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
5 ctrl+alt+f5 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
6 ctrl+alt+f6 X 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

4.2. 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux text mode installation program uses a screen-based interface that includes most of the on-screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces. 圖形 4.1, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, and 圖形 4.2, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, illustrate the screens that appear during the installation process.

注意

文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ GUI 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,LVM(Logical Volume Management)磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ LVM 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

圖形 4.1. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

圖形 4.2. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

  • 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ — 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​)會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​疊​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​;在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​ — 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​亦​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ # 字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Scroll Bar — Scroll bars appear on the side or bottom of a window to control which part of a list or document is currently in the window's frame. The scroll bar makes it easy to move to any part of a file.
  • 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​ — 雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ widget,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​(對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​)一​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ widget。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ widget 之​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ widget 改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​顏​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​鄰​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ widget。​​​​​​​

4.2.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​

藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 左​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Alt-Tab 來​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To "press" a button, position the cursor over the button (using Tab, for example) and press Space or Enter. To select an item from a list of items, move the cursor to the item you wish to select and press Enter. To select an item with a checkbox, move the cursor to the checkbox and press Space to select an item. To deselect, press Space a second time.
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ F12 接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​;這​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

4.3. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

To start, first make sure that you have all necessary resources for the installation. If you have already read through 章 2, 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​, and followed the instructions, you should be ready to start the installation process. When you have verified that you are ready to begin, boot the installation program using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or CD-ROM #1 or any boot media that you have created.

注意

Occasionally, some hardware components require a driver diskette during the installation. A driver diskette adds support for hardware that is not otherwise supported by the installation program. Refer to 章 7, Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ for more information.

4.3.1. 在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ USB 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • PXE boot via network — Your machine supports booting from the network. This is an advanced installation path. Refer to 章 31, PXE 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ for additional information on this method.
將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ USB 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ BIOS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​BIOS設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​訴​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ BIOS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ BIOS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ C, A 或​​​​​​​ A, C (依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ [C] 或​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​ [A] 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ C 或​​​​​​​ A (看​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​)為​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ BIOS 前​​​​​​​,記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​輔​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​輔​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​輔​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​輔​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​輔​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​遲​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Normally, you only need to press Enter to boot. Be sure to watch the boot messages to review if the Linux kernel detects your hardware. If your hardware is properly detected, continue to the next section. If it does not properly detect your hardware, you may need to restart the installation and use one of the boot options provided in 章 8, 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​.

4.3.2. 在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

Your Itanium system should be able to boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program directly from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1. If your Itanium cannot boot the installation program from the CD-ROM (or if you want to perform a hard drive, NFS, FTP, or HTTP installation) you must boot from an LS-120 diskette. Refer to 節 4.3.2.2, “從​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​” for more information.

4.3.2.1. 從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​CD-ROM #1 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Boot Option 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ EFI Shell。​​​​​​​
  3. At the Shell> prompt, change to the file system on the CD-ROM. For example, in the above sample map output, the system partition on the CD-ROM is fs1. To change to the fs1 file system, type fs1: at the prompt.
  4. 請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux 以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.3.2.2. 從​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Itanium 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ 、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ LS-120 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​CD-ROM #1 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ LS-120 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
dd if=boot.img of=/dev/hda bs=180k
請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ boot.img,並​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ /dev/hda。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 請​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ boot.img 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,假​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ 您​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD # 1。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Boot Option 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ EFI Shell。​​​​​​​
  3. At the Shell> prompt, change the device to the LS-120 drive by typing the command fs0:, using the example map output above.
  4. 請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux 以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.3.3. 額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​卻​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For Itanium users:
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​:
elilo linux option
For x86, AMD64, and Intel® 64 users:
在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • To perform a text mode installation, at the installation boot prompt, type:
    linux text
  • ISO images have an md5sum embedded in them. To test the checksum integrity of an ISO image, at the installation boot prompt, type:
    linux mediacheck
    安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CD 或​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ CD,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​CD-ROM #1 )。​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Also in the images/ directory is the boot.iso file. This file is an ISO image than can be used to boot the installation program. To use the boot.iso, your computer must be able to boot from its CD-ROM drive, and its BIOS settings must be configured to do so. You must then burn the boot.iso file onto a recordable/rewriteable CD-ROM.
  • If you need to perform the installation in serial mode, type the following command:
    linux console=<device>
    如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
    linux text console=<device>
    In the above command, <device> should be the device you are using (such as ttyS0 or ttyS1). For example, linux text console=ttyS0.
    Text mode installations using a serial terminal work best when the terminal supports UTF-8. Under UNIX and Linux, Kermit supports UTF-8. For Windows, Kermit '95 works well. Non-UTF-8 capable terminals works as long as only English is used during the installation process. An enhanced serial display can be used by passing the utf8 command as a boot-time option to the installation program. For example:
    linux console=ttyS0 utf8

4.3.3.1. 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ anaconda 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
linux updates
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
linux text updates
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ anaconda 更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​ rhupdates/ 放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you need to specify boot options to identify your hardware, please write them down. The boot options are needed during the boot loader configuration portion of the installation (refer to 節 4.19, “x86, AMD64, 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​” for more information).

4.4. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​?您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
DVD/CD-ROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
If you have a DVD/CD-ROM drive and the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROMs or DVD you can use this method. Refer to 節 4.5, “從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, for DVD/CD-ROM installation instructions.
硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
If you have copied the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images to a local hard drive, you can use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 節 4.6, “從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, for hard drive installation instructions.
NFS
If you are installing from an NFS server using ISO images or a mirror image of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you can use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 節 4.8, “經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​” for network installation instructions. Note that NFS installations may also be performed in GUI mode.
FTP
If you are installing directly from an FTP server, use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 節 4.9, “經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, for FTP installation instructions.
HTTP
If you are installing directly from an HTTP (Web) server, use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 節 4.10, “經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, for HTTP installation instructions.

4.5. 從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD/CD-ROM, place the DVD or CD #1 in your DVD/CD-ROM drive and boot your system from the DVD/CD-ROM.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your CD-ROM drive. It starts by looking for an IDE (also known as an ATAPI) CD-ROM drive.

注意

To abort the installation process at this time, reboot your machine and then eject the boot media. You can safely cancel the installation at any point before the About to Install screen. Refer to 節 4.24, “準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​” for more information.
If your CD-ROM drive is not detected, and it is a SCSI CD-ROM, the installation program prompts you to choose a SCSI driver. Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter. You may specify options for the driver if necessary; however, most drivers detect your SCSI adapter automatically.
If the DVD/CD-ROM drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer will present you with the option to perform a media check on the DVD/CD-ROM. This will take some time, and you may opt to skip over this step. However, if you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media check before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the installation process (refer to 節 4.11, “歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux”).

4.5.1. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ IDE CD-ROM 的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,該​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ IDE(ATAPI)DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​ boot 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux hdX=cdrom。​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ X 改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ master 或​​​​​​​ slave(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​副​​​​​​​):
  • a — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​master
  • b — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​slave
  • c — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​master
  • d — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​slave
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ master 到​​​​​​​ slave 的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.6. 從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

The Select Partition screen applies only if you are installing from a disk partition (that is, if you selected Hard Drive in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog allows you to name the disk partition and directory from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 4.3. 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

Enter the device name of the partition containing the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images. This partition must be formatted with a ext2 or vfat filesystem, and cannot be a logical volume. There is also a field labeled Directory holding images.
If the ISO images are in the root (top-level) directory of a partition, enter a /. If the ISO images are located in a subdirectory of a mounted partition, enter the name of the directory holding the ISO images within that partition. For example, if the partition on which the ISO images is normally mounted as /home/, and the images are in /home/new/, you would enter /new/.
After you have identified the disk partition, the Welcome dialog appears.

4.7. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ TCP/IP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ IP 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ DHCP 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IPv4 或​​​​​​​ IPv6資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ IPv4資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
TCP/IP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 4.4. TCP/IP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

4.8. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ NFS)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ example.com 網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ eastcoast 的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ eastcoast.example.com。​​​​​​​
Next, enter the name of the exported directory. If you followed the setup described in 節 2.5, “準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, you would enter the directory /export/directory/.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鏡​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ RedHat 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 4.5. NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.9. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ FTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 4.6. FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/ (可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

4.10. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ HTTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390x)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 4.7. HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

4.11. 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.12. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

Using your mouse, select a language to use for the installation (refer to 圖形 4.8, “選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​”).
您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

圖形 4.8. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.13. 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,US English),用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 4.9. 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

注意

更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-keyboard 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.14. 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

Enter your Installation Number (refer to 圖形 4.10, “Installation Number”). This number will determine the package selection set that is available to the installer. If you choose to skip entering the installation number you will be presented with a basic selection of packages to install later on.
Installation Number

圖形 4.10. Installation Number

4.15. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Partitioning allows you to divide your hard drive into isolated sections, where each section behaves as its own hard drive. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating systems. If you are not sure how you want your system to be partitioned, read 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​ for more information.
On this screen you can choose to create the default layout or choose to manual partition using the 'Create custom layout' option of Disk Druid.
自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​握​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
You can configure an iSCSI target for installation, or disable a dmraid device from this screen by clicking on the 'Advanced storage configuration' button. For more information refer to 節 4.16, “進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​”.

警告

Update Agent 會​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /var/spool/up2date/。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /var/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​(3.0 GB 以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 4.11. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​,發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​:
"The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive."
在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
曾​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ EZ-BIOS 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​(假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.16. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

圖形 4.12. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dmraid 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ dmraid 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ iSCSI(SCSI 傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​ TCP/P)。​​​​​​​
To configure an ISCSI target invoke the 'Configure ISCSI Parameters' dialog by selecting 'Add ISCSI target' and clicking on the 'Add Drive' button. Fill in the details for the ISCSI target IP and provide a unique ISCSI initiator name to identify this system. Click the 'Add target' button to attempt connection to the ISCSI target using this information.
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ISCSI 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

圖形 4.13. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ISCSI 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISCSI 目​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​ IP,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ ISCSI 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.17. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ VFAT 或​​​​​​​ NTFS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

    警告

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ VFAT 或​​​​​​​ FAT32 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 4.14. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

If you chose one of the three automatic partitioning options and did not select Review, skip ahead to 節 4.20, “網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​),或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid(一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ LVM(邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​頁​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If you have not yet planned how to set up your partitions, refer to 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​ and 節 4.18.4, “建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​”. At a bare minimum, you need an appropriately-sized root partition, and a swap partition equal to twice the amount of RAM you have on the system. Itanium system users should have a /boot/efi/ partition of approximately 100 MB and of type FAT (VFAT), a swap partition of at least 512 MB, and an appropriately-sized root (/) partition.
在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​ AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

圖形 4.15. 在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​ AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Disk Druid。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,Disk Druid 可​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.1. 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

Disk Druid 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Above the display, you can review the Drive name (such as /dev/hda), the Geom (which shows the hard disk's geometry and consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors as reported by the hard disk), and the Model of the hard drive as detected by the installation program.

4.18.2. Disk Druid's Buttons

These buttons control Disk Druid's actions. They are used to change the attributes of a partition (for example the file system type and mount point) and also to create RAID devices. Buttons on this screen are also used to accept the changes you have made, or to exit Disk Druid. For further explanation, take a look at each button in order:
  • 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屬​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ RAID 來​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ 目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 還​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ 還​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • RAID:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​(redundancy)給​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ RAID,來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • LVM:讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM(Logical Volume Manager)的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​呈​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux System Administration Guide。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ LVM。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ LVM 來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.3. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • Device: This field displays the partition's device name.
  • Mount Point/RAID/Volume: A mount point is the location within the directory hierarchy at which a volume exists; the volume is "mounted" at this location. This field indicates where the partition is mounted. If a partition exists, but is not set, then you need to define its mount point. Double-click on the partition or click the Edit button.
  • Type: This field shows the partition's file system type (for example, ext2, ext3, or vfat).
  • 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Size (MB): This field shows the partition's size (in MB).
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
隱​​​​​​​藏​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​/LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.4. 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​

4.18.4.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

Unless you have a reason for doing otherwise, we recommend that you create the following partitions for Itanium systems:
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 100 MB)— 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​initrd 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ ELILO 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    警告

    您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 100 MB 且​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ VFAT 類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256 MB) — swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​,電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ swap 類​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 2 GB 為​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:2 GB 以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB 的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​,swap 都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 32 MB。​​​​​​​
    因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ GB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ S = swap 容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​GB為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​),則​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​ 2 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 4 GB(2x2 = 4);而​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 3 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 5 GB(2x2 + (3-2)x1)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 32 GB)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​約​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) — this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup, all files (except those stored in /boot/efi) are on the root partition.
    一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 3.0 GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​;而​​​​​​​ 5.0GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.4.2. x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256 MB) — swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​,電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ swap 類​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 2 GB 為​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:2 GB 以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB 的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​,swap 都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 32 MB。​​​​​​​
    因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ GB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ S = swap 容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​GB為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​),則​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​ 2 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 4 GB(2x2 = 4);而​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 3 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 5 GB(2x2 + (3-2)x1)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 32 GB)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​約​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(100 MB) — 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /boot/,並​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​(讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux)與​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ext3 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,100 MB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​(而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) — this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup, all files (except those stored in /boot) are on the root partition.
    一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 3.0 GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​;而​​​​​​​ 5.0GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.5. 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

圖形 4.16. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

  • Mount Point: Enter the partition's mount point. For example, if this partition should be the root partition, enter /; enter /boot for the /boot partition, and so on. You can also use the pull-down menu to choose the correct mount point for your partition. For a swap partition the mount point should not be set - setting the filesystem type to swap is sufficient.
  • File System Type: Using the pull-down menu, select the appropriate file system type for this partition. For more information on file system types, refer to 節 4.18.5.1, “檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”.
  • Allowable Drives: This field contains a list of the hard disks installed on your system. If a hard disk's box is highlighted, then a desired partition can be created on that hard disk. If the box is not checked, then the partition will never be created on that hard disk. By using different checkbox settings, you can have Disk Druid place partitions where you need them, or let Disk Druid decide where partitions should go.
  • 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(MB):輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ MB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 100 MB;除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ 100 MB 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Additional Size Options: Choose whether to keep this partition at a fixed size, to allow it to "grow" (fill up the available hard drive space) to a certain point, or to allow it to grow to fill any remaining hard drive space available.
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 填​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ (MB),您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​:一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.5.1. 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,基​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​短​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • ext2 — 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ext2 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Unix 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​長​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 255 個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • ext3 — ext3 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ext2 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​優​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​ — 日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(journaling)。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​減​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ fsck,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​降​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​[2] 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ ext3 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ (LVM) — 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,LVM 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ LVM 相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
  • 軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID — 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID(磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​) 章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • swap — Swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
  • vfat — VFAT 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ FAT 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​長​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Itanuim 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.6. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If the partition already exists on your disk, you can only change the partition's mount point. To make any other changes, you must delete the partition and recreate it.

4.18.7. 刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19. x86, AMD64, 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​負​​​​​​​責​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​遞​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB(GRand Unified Bootloader)是​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​GRUB 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​費​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ chain-loading (藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ DOS 或​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,來​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​專​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 4.17. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB 當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​廠​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​!
Every bootable partition is listed, including partitions used by other operating systems. The partition holding the system's root file system has a Label of Red Hat Enterprise Linux (for GRUB). Other partitions may also have boot labels. To add or change the boot label for other partitions that have been detected by the installation program, click once on the partition to select it. Once selected, you can change the boot label by clicking the Edit button.
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​旁​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​串​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​危​​​​​​​害​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​觸​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ USB 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ BIOS 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​涵​​​​​​​蓋​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​,同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​遞​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ 已​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.1. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:
  • The master boot record (MBR) — This is the recommended place to install a boot loader, unless the MBR already starts another operating system loader, such as System Commander. The MBR is a special area on your hard drive that is automatically loaded by your computer's BIOS, and is the earliest point at which the boot loader can take control of the boot process. If you install it in the MBR, when your machine boots, GRUB presents a boot prompt. You can then boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux or any other operating system that you have configured the boot loader to boot.
  • The first sector of your boot partition — This is recommended if you are already using another boot loader on your system. In this case, your other boot loader takes control first. You can then configure that boot loader to start GRUB, which then boots Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

圖形 4.18. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ MBR。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ SCSI 與​​​​​​​ IDE 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LBA32 (通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​) 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ LBA32 延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

當​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ /boot Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Linux,至​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​ 區​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ parted 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 528MB,如​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​:
http://www.pcguide.com/ref/hdd/bios/sizeMB504-c.html
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​遞​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.2. 救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

Rescue mode provides the ability to boot a small Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment entirely from boot media or some other boot method instead of the system's hard drive. There may be times when you are unable to get Red Hat Enterprise Linux running completely enough to access files on your system's hard drive. Using rescue mode, you can access the files stored on your system's hard drive, even if you cannot actually run Red Hat Enterprise Linux from that hard drive. If you need to use rescue mode, try the following method:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ x86, AMD64, 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux rescue Itanium使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux rescue 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​

4.19.3. 可​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​:
LOADLIN
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​幸​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAM 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LOADLIN 可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​射​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
SYSLINUX
SYSLINUX 是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​ LOADLIN。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​射​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Commercial boot loaders
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,System Commander 與​​​​​​​ Partition Magic 都​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Linux (仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB 在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​ LOADLIN 和​​​​​​​ System Commander的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​廠​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,Red Hat並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.4. SMP 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ GRUB

舊​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ SMP 版​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ SMP 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​緒​​​​​​​(hyperthreading)和​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​央​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​優​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​央​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​緒​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.20. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

If you do not have a network device, this screen does not appear during your installation and you should advance to 節 4.21, “時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 4.19. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ DHCP 來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP,手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ DHCP 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 4.20. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​(合​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ DHCP 自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IP 與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DNS 的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

即​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​趁​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ localhost。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-network 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.21. 時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Set your time zone by selecting the city closest to your computer's physical location. Click on the map to zoom in to a particular geographical region of the world.
欲​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​:
  • 藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​城​​​​​​​市​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​黃​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​X表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ UTC 的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC。​​​​​​​

注意

欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-date 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ timeconfig 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.22. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ NT 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ administrator 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ RPMs 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掌​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ - superuser)對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ 只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

圖形 4.21. Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​減​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root,只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,[3] 您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​猜​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​qwerty、​​​​​​​password、​​​​​​​root、​​​​​​​123456 和​​​​​​​ anteater 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​混​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:Aard387vark 或​​​​​​​ 420BMttNT 都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-rootpassword 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.23. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ 自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 後​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​(根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Users of Itanium systems who want support for developing or running 32-bit applications are encouraged to select the Compatibility Arch Support and Compatibility Arch Development Support packages to install architecure specific support for their systems.
選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

圖形 4.22. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

圖形 4.23. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

4.24. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

4.24.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /root/install.log 找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​棄​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​遭​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​破​​​​​​​壞​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To cancel this installation process, press your computer's Reset button or use the Control+Alt+Delete key combination to restart your machine.

4.25. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​

At this point there is nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed. How quickly this happens depends on the number of packages you have selected and your computer's speed.

4.26. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​

恭​​​​​​​喜​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​!您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​!
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
After your computer's normal power-up sequence has completed, the graphical boot loader prompt appears at which you can do any of the following things:
  • 按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter — 將​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter — 將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Do nothing — after the boot loader's timeout period, (by default, five seconds) the boot loader automatically boots the default boot entry.
做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ login: 的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ runlevel(執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​)5 時​​​​​​​(圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​runlevel),您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.27. Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ — 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Itanium 機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ EFI 主​​​​​​​ 控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux:
elilo
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo 後​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ elilo 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ linux 的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
elilo linux
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 中​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​:
  1. At the Shell> prompt, change devices to the system partition (mounted as /boot/efi in Linux). For example, if fs0 is the system boot partition, type fs0: at the EFI Shell prompt.
  2. Type ls at the fs0:\> to make sure you are in the correct partition.
  3. 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
    Shell>type elilo.conf
    這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ label 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,後​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ elilo 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.27.1. 後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ single 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ mem=1024M 以​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 1024MB 的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ linux, 以​​​​​​​ 您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ option):
elilo linux option

4.27.2. 自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI SHell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​(依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​):
  1. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 從​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 中​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ elilo.efi 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  5. 在​​​​​​​ 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  6. 在​​​​​​​ 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ N 表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ 無​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​(當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ ELILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​乎​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  7. 在​​​​​​​ 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ NVRAM 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​答​​​​​​​ Yes, 您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  8. 再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​, 在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ u 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​頂​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​, 再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ d 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​, 請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ NVRAM,再​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  9. Optionally, you can change the boot timeout value by choosing Set Auto Boot TimeOut => Set Timeout Value from the Main Menu.
  10. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.27.2.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ELILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ ELILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ startup.nsh 的​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ elilo 以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​
startup.nsh 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /boot/efi 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​(/boot/efi/startup.nsh), 而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​:
echo -off your set of commands elilo
You can either create this file after booting into Red Hat Enterprise Linux or use the editor built into the EFI shell. To use the EFI shell, at the Shell> prompt, change devices to the system partition (mounted as /boot/efi in Linux). For example, if fs0 is the system boot partition, type fs0: at the EFI Shell prompt. Type ls to make sure you are in the correct partition. Then type edit startup.nsh. Type the contents of the file and save it.
下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,EFI 會​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ startup.nsh 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 它​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​ EFI 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Ctrl+c。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[2] fsck 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​(metadata)的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ Linux 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
[3] 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 5. 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

從​​​​​​​ x86-based 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(MBR)移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​難​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​DOS與​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​fdisk公​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​/mbr,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(MBR)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​DOS分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(MBR)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
fdisk /mbr
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ Linux 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DOS(微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​)fdisk,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ "分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​" 的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ DOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​ DOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:linux rescue。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​訴​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​,程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,且​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​(Skip)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,好​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ list-harddrives。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​MB - 百​​​​​​​萬​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

警告

請​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ parted 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ parted,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /dev/hda 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
parted /dev/hda
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ print 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​(minor number):
列印
The print command also displays the partition's type (such as linux-swap, ext2, ext3, and so on). Knowing the type of the partition helps you in determining whether to remove the partition.
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ rm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 3 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
rm 3

重要

在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ [Enter] 後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ print 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ quit 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ parted 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ parted 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ exit 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Control+Alt+Delete . 來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 6. Intel® 或​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.1. 您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

6.1.1. 您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,卻​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,GRUB:)與​​​​​​​閃​​​​​​​爍​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​劃​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​喜​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(GRUB 或​​​​​​​ LILO)在​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.1.2. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ Signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​ 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​signl ll 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​良​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you receive a fatal signal 11 error during your installation, it is probably due to a hardware error in memory on your system's bus. Like other operating systems, Red Hat Enterprise Linux places its own demands on your system's hardware. Some of this hardware may not be able to meet those demands, even if they work properly under another OS.
請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​ Red Hat 最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ errata,以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​係​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ CPU 快​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​ BIOS 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CPU 快​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Re d Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,對​​​​​​​象​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo),輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
	linux mediacheck
需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ signal 11 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​:
	http://www.bitwizard.nl/sig11/

6.2. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

6.2.1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​降​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
One possible solution is to try using the resolution= boot option. This option may be most helpful for laptop users. Another solution to try is the driver= option to specify the driver that should be loaded for your video card. If this works, it should be reported as a bug as the installer has failed to autodetect your videocard. Refer to 章 8, 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ for more information on boot options.

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ frame buffer 的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ nofb 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

6.3.1. 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​ 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​ SCSI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Check your hardware vendor's website to determine if a driver diskette image is available that fixes your problem. For more general information on driver diskettes, refer to 章 7, Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​.
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat 硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​

6.3.2. 缺​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​ traceback 訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ traceback 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ scp 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​ traceback 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,traceback 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Alt+F2 切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ tty(虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​scp 訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.3. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (節 4.15, “磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ EZ-BIOS 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​曾​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​(假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​)而​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.4. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ swap 和​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.5. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
您​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, do not assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

6.3.6. 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
您​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ VFAT 類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, you do not have to assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

6.3.7. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ Python 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​ anaconda) 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Python 或​​​​​​​ traceback 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
Traceback (innermost last):
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/iw/progress_gui.py", line 20, in run
rc = self.todo.doInstall ()    
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/todo.py", line 1468, in doInstall 
self.fstab.savePartitions ()    
File "fstab.py", line 221, in savePartitions      
sys.exit(0)  
SystemExit: 0   
Local variables in innermost frame:  
self: <fstab.GuiFstab instance at 8446fe0>  
sys: <module 'sys' (built-in)>  
ToDo object:  (itodo  ToDo  p1  (dp2  S'method'  p3  (iimage  CdromInstallMethod  
p4  (dp5  S'progressWindow'  p6   <failed>
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 的​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ Anaconda 的​​​​​​​ errata。​​​​​​​ Errata 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/
anaconda 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​:
http://rhlinux.redhat.com/anaconda/
You can also search for bug reports related to this problem. To search Red Hat's bug tracking system, go to:
http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 欲​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/apps/activate/

6.4. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

6.4.1. 在​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ GRUB 有​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ splashimage 那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ #,讓​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ b 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.2. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ startx 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ root。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ gedit /etc/inittab 以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ gedit 來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/etc/inittab 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​:
# Default runlevel. The runlevels used by RHS are: 
#   0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#   1 - Single user mode 
#   2 - Multiuser, without NFS (The same as 3, if you do not have networking) 
#   3 - Full multiuser mode 
#   4 - unused 
#   5 - X11 
#   6 - reboot (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#  id:3:initdefault:
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​ id:3:initdefault: 這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 3 為​​​​​​​ 5。​​​​​​​

警告

『​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​』​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​(由​​​​​​​ 3 改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 5)。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
	 id:5:initdefault: 
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Q 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.3. X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(GUI)有​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X(X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​),在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ GNOME、​​​​​​​KDE 或​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.4. 關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,欠​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
df -h
df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ -h 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​),請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ df 的​​​​​​​ man page。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ man df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​,莫​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 100%,或​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 90% 或​​​​​​​ 95% 以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/home/ 與​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​塞​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​;之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X 看​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.5. 當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ linux single 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Itanium 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ elilo 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ x86 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ GRUB 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ kernel 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ e 以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ kernel 這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​:
	single
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ b 以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ # 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ passwd root,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ shutdown -r now,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you cannot remember your user account password, you must become root. To become root, type su - and enter your root password when prompted. Then, type passwd <username>. This allows you to enter a new password for the specified user account.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Hardware Compatibility List 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
	http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

6.4.6. 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cat /proc/meminfo 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
mem=xxM
將​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​百​​​​​​​萬​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ xx。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,上​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
# NOTICE: You have a /boot partition. This means that 
#  all kernel paths are relative to /boot/ 
default=0 
timeout=30 
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux (2.6.9-5.EL)         
root (hd0,0)         
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.9-5.EL ro root=/dev/hda3 mem=128M
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​ GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ kernel 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ kernel 那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​
mem=xxM
xx 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ b 以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Itanium 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ elilo 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ xx。​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 後​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.7. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-printer 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.8. 音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​聽​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​聲​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​;但​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​system-config-soundcard指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To use the Sound Card Configuration Tool, choose Main Menu => System => Administration => Soundcard Detection in GNOME, or Main Menu => Administration => Soundcard Detection in KDE. A small text box pops up prompting you for your root password.
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-soundcard 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​ 音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ 音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​播​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​)很​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 暫​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.9. Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ Sendmail 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 或​​​​​​​ Sendmail 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/hosts 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
127.0.0.1  localhost.localdomain  localhost

章 7. Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​

7.1. 為​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

當​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux dd(Itanium 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux dd
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ PCI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

7.2. 那​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​甚​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat 所​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​銷​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(NFS)的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 或​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.3. 我​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

Driver images can be obtained from several sources. They may be included with Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or they may be available from a hardware or software vendor's website. If you suspect that your system may require one of these drivers, you should create a driver diskette or CD-ROM before beginning your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 收​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ images/drvnet.img — 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ images/drvblock.img — SCSI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​極​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux dd 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux dd=url 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ url 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ NFS 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Another option for finding specialized driver information is on Red Hat's website at
在​​​​​​​ 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,Red Hat 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.3.1. 從​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 從​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​:
  1. 請​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)在​​​​​​​ 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ LS-120)磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 在​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ drvnet.img,以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ dd if=drvnet.img of=/dev/fd0。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ driverdisk.img 至​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
dd if=driverdisk.img of=/dev/sda
然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.4. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
For example, to specifically load a driver diskette that you have created, begin the installation process by booting from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 (or using boot media you have created). For x86-based systems, at the boot: prompt, enter linux dd if using an x86 or x86-64 system. Refer to 節 4.3.1, “在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​” for details on booting the installation program. For Itanium systems, at the Shell> prompt, type elilo linux dd. Refer to 節 4.3.2, “在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​” for details on booting the installation program.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 8. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

askmethod
在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apic
此​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Intel 440GX 晶​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 經​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apm=allow_ints
此​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(這​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​筆​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
apm=off
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​(APM)。​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​AMP不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​,容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​BIOS。​​​​​​​
apm=power_off
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​(電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​)管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SMP 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apm=realmode_power_off
在​​​​​​​x86-based 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ NT 更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 95 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd=url
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ NFS 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
display=ip:0
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ IP。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ remotehostname 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​授​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
driverdisk
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ dd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​;
ide=nodma
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DMA,這​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
linux upgradeany
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​寬​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​/etc/redhat-release 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ /etc/redhat-release檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5時​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ISO 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)之​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO 與​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​ ISO 影​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mem=xxxm
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 16MB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​百​​​​​​​萬​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ xxx。​​​​​​​
nmi_watchdog=1
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​頓​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​週​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​(NMA)來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​鎖​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​監​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ CPU 的​​​​​​​鎖​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noapic
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ APIC 晶​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​良​​​​​​​ APIC(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​陞​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​ Abit BP6)或​​​​​​​ BIOS 有​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ NVIDIA nForce3 晶​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​華​​​​​​​碩​​​​​​​ ASUS SK8N)在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​ IDE、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noht
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​緒​​​​​​​(hyperthreading)。​​​​​​​
nofb
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​緩​​​​​​​衝​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​( frame buffer )的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nomce
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CPU 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CPU 的​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​(稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Machine Check Exception)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Compaq Pentium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​筆​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​(特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Radeon IGP 晶​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​),也​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nonet
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​
nopass
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nopcmcia
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noprobe
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noshell
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 2 的​​​​​​​ shell 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nostorage
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​ SCSI 和​​​​​​​ RAID 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousb
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ USB 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousbstorage
this command disables the loading of the usbstorage module in the installation program's loader. It may help with device ordering on SCSI systems.
numa=off
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 在​​​​​​​ AMD64 結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​均​​​​​​​勻​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​(NUMA)。​​​​​​​雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​央​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ numa 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​numa 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​央​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ CPU 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​阻​​​​​​​塞​​​​​​​降​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​ numa 狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
reboot=b
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ x86, AMD64, 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​Intel® EM64T 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
rescue
resolution=
指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​640x480、​​​​​​​800x600、​​​​​​​1024x768 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
serial
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​串​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
text
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ anaconda安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​)軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rhupdates/ 中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates=
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ anaconda 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​URL。​​​​​​​
vnc
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vncpassword=
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 9. GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

When a computer with Red Hat Enterprise Linux is turned on, the operating system is loaded into memory by a special program called a boot loader. A boot loader usually exists on the system's primary hard drive (or other media device) and has the sole responsibility of loading the Linux kernel with its required files or (in some cases) other operating systems into memory.

9.1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​

每​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:

表格 9.1. 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​ 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
AMD® AMD64 GRUB
IBM® eServerSystem i OS/400®
IBM® eServerSystem p YABOOT
IBM® System z® z/IPL
IBM® System z® z/IPL
Intel® Itanium ELILO
x86 GRUB
本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​隨​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.2. GRUB

GNU GRand Unified Boot loader (GRUB)是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​遞​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.2.1. GRUB以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ x86 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

GRUB 依​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​:
  1. The Stage 1 or primary boot loader is read into memory by the BIOS from the MBR[4]. The primary boot loader exists on less than 512 bytes of disk space within the MBR and is capable of loading either the Stage 1.5 or Stage 2 boot loader.
  2. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​,1.5 階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ 1 階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ 某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​緩​​​​​​​衝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​ 2 階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​尤​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 1024 磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LBA 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ MBR 與​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 第​​​​​​​ 2 階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ 次​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 次​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ /boot/sysroot/ 的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​緩​​​​​​​衝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​® 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​® 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 連​​​​​​​鎖​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,MBR 指​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​鎖​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​絕​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

During installation, Microsoft's DOS and Windows installation programs completely overwrite the MBR, destroying any existing boot loaders. If creating a dual-boot system, it is best to install the Microsoft operating system first.

9.2.2. GRUB 的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​

GRUB 擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​:
  • 在​​​​​​​ x86 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ GRUB 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ x86 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • GRUB supports Logical Block Addressing (LBA) mode. LBA places the addressing conversion used to find files in the hard drive's firmware, and is used on many IDE and all SCSI hard devices. Before LBA, boot loaders could encounter the 1024-cylinder BIOS limitation, where the BIOS could not find a file after the 1024 cylinder head of the disk. LBA support allows GRUB to boot operating systems from partitions beyond the 1024-cylinder limit, so long as the system BIOS supports LBA mode. Most modern BIOS revisions support LBA mode.
  • GRUB can read ext2 partitions. This functionality allows GRUB to access its configuration file, /boot/grub/grub.conf, every time the system boots, eliminating the need for the user to write a new version of the first stage boot loader to the MBR when configuration changes are made. The only time a user needs to reinstall GRUB on the MBR is if the physical location of the /boot/ partition is moved on the disk. For details on installing GRUB to the MBR, refer to 節 9.3, “安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB ”.

9.3. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ GRUB 沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ GRUB 會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUB 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RPM 進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Once the GRUB package is installed, open a root shell prompt and run the command /sbin/grub-install <location>, where <location> is the location that the GRUB Stage 1 boot loader should be installed. For example, the following command installs GRUB to the MBR of the master IDE device on the primary IDE bus:
/sbin/grub-install /dev/hda
在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,GRUB 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

重要

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ GRUB 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ RAID 1 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​靠​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​:

9.4. GRUB 專​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB。​​​​​​​

9.4.1. 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,括​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​):
(<type-of-device><bios-device-number>,<partition-number>)
The <type-of-device> specifies the type of device from which GRUB boots. The two most common options are hd for a hard disk or fd for a 3.5 diskette. A lesser used device type is also available called nd for a network disk. Instructions on configuring GRUB to boot over the network are available online at http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/.
The <bios-device-number> is the BIOS device number. The primary IDE hard drive is numbered 0 and a secondary IDE hard drive is numbered 1. This syntax is roughly equivalent to that used for devices by the kernel. For example, the a in hda for the kernel is analogous to the 0 in hd0 for GRUB, the b in hdb is analogous to the 1 in hd1, and so on.
The <partition-number> specifies the number of a partition on a device. Like the <bios-device-number>, most types of partitions are numbered starting at 0. However, BSD partitions are specified using letters, with a corresponding to 0, b corresponding to 1, and so on.

注意

GRUB 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 0 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ 1。​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​犯​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​弄​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,GRUB 會​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ (hd0)然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ (hd1)。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​ GRUB 會​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ (hd0,0),次​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ (hd1,2)。​​​​​​​
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​律​​​​​​​:
  • 不​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IDE 或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ hd 開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​fd 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ 3.5 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ GRUB 來​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ MBR 是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,(hd0) 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ MBR 在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,(hd3) 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ MBR 在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​ BIOS 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ IDE 或​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.4.2. 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ GRUB 時​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​:
(<device-type><device-number>,<partition-number>)</path/to/file>
In this example, replace <device-type> with hd, fd, or nd. Replace <device-number> with the integer for the device. Replace </path/to/file> with an absolute path relative to the top-level of the device.
同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ GRUB,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ blocklist。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​,blocklist會​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​ blocklist :
0+50,100+25,200+1
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​ blocklist 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​ 0 到​​​​​​​ 49、​​​​​​​100 到​​​​​​​ 124 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ 200。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 在​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,blocklist 的​​​​​​​撰​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​ 0 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:
(hd0,0)+1
在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ root 後​​​​​​​,於​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ blocklist 相​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ chainloader 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
chainloader +1

9.4.3. Root 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ GRUB

The use of the term root file system has a different meaning in regard to GRUB. It is important to remember that GRUB's root file system has nothing to do with the Linux root file system.
GRUB root 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/grub/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​ (hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 於​​​​​​​(hd0,0) 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root)。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ kernel 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB root 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​,他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Refer to the root and kernel commands in 節 9.6, “GRUB 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​” for more information.

9.5. GRUB 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

GRUB 有​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:

注意

您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​秒​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​ GRUB 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Menu Interface
此​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ GRUB 由​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​東​​​​​​​西​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ GRUB 會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​ e 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ c 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Menu Entry Editor Interface
請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ e 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​(o在​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​裂​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​,O為​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​(e)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​(d)指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​ 。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,b鍵​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Esc 鍵​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​棄​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​c 鍵​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

For information about changing runlevels using the GRUB menu entry editor, refer to 節 9.8, “Changing Runlevels at Boot Time”.
Command Line Interface
指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​ shell 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Tab 鍵​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ Ctrl 組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ Ctrl+a 來​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​Ctrl+e 移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​尾​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​Home、​​​​​​​End 與​​​​​​​ Delete 也​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ bash shell 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.5.1. 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​ GRUB 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​秒​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​,GRUB 會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​ GRUB 會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,GRUB 會​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​癥​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ GRUB 回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​,GRUB 會​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.6. GRUB 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

GRUB 在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
  • boot — 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • chainloader </path/to/file> — Loads the specified file as a chain loader. If the file is located on the first sector of the specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1, instead of the file name.
    下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​ chainloader 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
    chainloader +1
  • displaymem — 依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​ BIOS 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • initrd </path/to/initrd> — Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when booting. An initrd is necessary when the kernel needs certain modules in order to boot properly, such as when the root partition is formatted with the ext3 file system.
    下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​ initrd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    initrd /initrd-2.6.8-1.523.img
  • install <stage-1> <install-disk> <stage-2> p config-file — Installs GRUB to the system MBR.
    • <stage-1> — Signifies a device, partition, and file where the first boot loader image can be found, such as (hd0,0)/grub/stage1.
    • <install-disk> — Specifies the disk where the stage 1 boot loader should be installed, such as (hd0).
    • <stage-2> — Passes the stage 2 boot loader location to the stage 1 boot loader, such as (hd0,0)/grub/stage2.
    • p <config-file> — This option tells the install command to look for the menu configuration file specified by <config-file>, such as (hd0,0)/grub/grub.conf.

    警告

    install 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​蓋​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ MBR 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> ... — Specifies the kernel file to load when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the partition specified by the root command. Replace <option-1> with options for the Linux kernel, such as root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 to specify the device on which the root partition for the system is located. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel in a space separated list.
    下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ kernel 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.8-1.523 ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00
    上​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ hda5 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux root 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition.
    下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ root 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    root (hd0,0)
  • rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ help --all 來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ GRUB 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/。​​​​​​​

9.7. GRUB選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​

The configuration file (/boot/grub/grub.conf), which is used to create the list of operating systems to boot in GRUB's menu interface, essentially allows the user to select a pre-set group of commands to execute. The commands given in 節 9.6, “GRUB 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​” can be used, as well as some special commands that are only available in the configuration file.

9.7.1. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​

GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 或​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 2000 的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​:
default=0 
timeout=10 
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 
hiddenmenu 
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (2.6.18-2.el5PAE)         
root (hd0,0)         
kernel /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.18-2.el5PAE ro root=LABEL=/1 rhgb quiet       
initrd /boot/initrd-2.6.18-2.el5PAE.img

# section to load Windows 
title Windows         
rootnoverify (hd0,0)         
chainloader +1
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ GRUB 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 10 秒​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,與​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​歸​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ GRUB 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​ title 行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​ default=0 更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ default=1。​​​​​​​
Configuring a GRUB menu configuration file to boot multiple operating systems is beyond the scope of this chapter. Consult 節 9.9, “其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​” for a list of additional resources.

9.7.2. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
  • chainloader </path/to/file> — Loads the specified file as a chain loader. Replace </path/to/file> with the absolute path to the chain loader. If the file is located on the first sector of the specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1.
  • color <normal-color> <selected-color> — Allows specific colors to be used in the menu, where two colors are configured as the foreground and background. Use simple color names such as red/black. For example:
    color red/black green/blue
  • default=<integer> — Replace <integer> with the default entry title number to be loaded if the menu interface times out.
  • fallback=<integer> — Replace <integer> with the entry title number to try if the first attempt fails.
  • hiddenmenu — 使​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ timeout 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ default 項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Esc 鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • initrd </path/to/initrd> — Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when booting. Replace </path/to/initrd> with the absolute path to the initial RAM disk.
  • kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> — Specifies the kernel file to load when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the partition specified by the root directive. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel when it is loaded.
  • password=<password> — Prevents a user who does not know the password from editing the entries for this menu option.
    Optionally, it is possible to specify an alternate menu configuration file after the password=<password> directive. In this case, GRUB restarts the second stage boot loader and uses the specified alternate configuration file to build the menu. If an alternate menu configuration file is left out of the command, a user who knows the password is allowed to edit the current configuration file.
    更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ GRUB 安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition.
  • rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
  • timeout=<integer> — Specifies the interval, in seconds, that GRUB waits before loading the entry designated in the default command.
  • splashimage=<path-to-image> — Specifies the location of the splash screen image to be used when GRUB boots.
  • title group-title — 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​擋​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​閱​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​湊​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(#)。​​​​​​​

9.8. Changing Runlevels at Boot Time

在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 下​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​:
  • 當​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​秒​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 按​​​​​​​ a 鍵​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​ kernel 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Add <space><runlevel> at the end of the boot options line to boot to the desired runlevel. For example, the following entry would initiate a boot process into runlevel 3:
    grub append> ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 rhgb quiet 3

9.9. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​

此​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ GRUB 導​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​深​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​ GRUB。​​​​​​​

9.9.1. 已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​

  • /usr/share/doc/grub-<version-number>/ — This directory contains good information about using and configuring GRUB, where <version-number> corresponds to the version of the GRUB package installed.
  • info grub — GRUB 資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​頁​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ GRUB 與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.9.2. 很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​

  • http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/ — GNU GRUB 的​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​頁​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ GRUB 發​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • http://kbase.redhat.com/faq/FAQ_43_4053.shtm — 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Linux 之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​
  • http://www.linuxgazette.com/issue64/kohli.html — 一​​​​​​​篇​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​門​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​綜​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[4] For more on the system BIOS and the MBR, refer to 節 30.2.1, “BIOS”.

章 10. 關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ Itanium 與​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​:

部 II. IBM POWER 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​ –​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​

IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​礙​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 11. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​

11.1. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

11.2. BM eServer System p 與​​​​​​​ System i 的​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

IBM eServer System p 與​​​​​​​ IBM eServer System i 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​;視​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ System p 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ HVSI 序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ T2 序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IBM System p 或​​​​​​​ IBM System i,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ HMC 上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​(虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​SCSI、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​HMC 的​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​精​​​​​​​靈​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For more information on creating the partition, refer to IBM's Infocenter article on Configuring Linux logical partitions available online at: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp?topic=/iphbi/iphbikickoff.htm
If you are using virtual SCSI resources, rather than native SCSI, you must configure a 'link' to the virtual SCSI serving partition, and then configure the virtual SCSI serving partition itself. You create a 'link' between the virtual SCSI client and server slots using the HMC. You can configure a virtual SCSI server on either AIX or i5/OS, depending on which model and options you have.
更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp?topic=/iphbi/iphbirelated.htm 的​​​​​​​ IBM 紅​​​​​​​皮​​​​​​​書​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ eServer i5 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ IBM 紅​​​​​​​皮​​​​​​​書​​​​​​​ SG24-6388-01, Implementing POWER Linux on IBM System i Platform 找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redpieces/abstracts/sg246388.html?Open。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ HMC 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ SMS 以​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.3. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer to 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​ before proceeding.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​[5]」​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,或​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​

11.4. 您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 或​​​​​​​ DVD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

欲​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​購​​​​​​​買​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

Make sure an installation CD (or any other type of CD) is not in your system's CD/DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a CD in the drive may cause unexpected errors.
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ yaboot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
	linux mediacheck

注意

在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /location/of/disk/space。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 公​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /export/directory。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/location/of/disk/space 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​創​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /var/isos 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/export/directory 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /var/www/html/rhel5。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Linux 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  • 請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​:
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
      dd if=/dev/dvd of=/location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso
      dvd 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ DVD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso
      cdrom 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ CD光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​X 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ 1 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,ISO 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
    在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso /export/directory/diskX/
    將​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ CD-ROM iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /var/isos/disk1.iso /var/www/html/rhel5-install/disk1/
下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5.2. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ iso 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ NFS 輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mv /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/disk*.iso /export/directory/
請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ /etc/exports.這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
/export/directory client.ip.address(ro,no_root_squash)
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​:
/export/directory *(ro,no_root_squash)
啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ NFS 保​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs start指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs reload)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​ NFS 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.6. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ ext2、​​​​​​​ext3、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ FAT 等​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ reiserfs,則​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ ISO(或​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​龐​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(二​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ — 從​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso 
    dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​ — 將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​(許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Linux 機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ updates.img 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ anaconda 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ anaconda RPM 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ install-methods.txt 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[5] 未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 12. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ IBM System i 與​​​​​​​ IBM System p 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

This chapter explains how to perform a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation from the DVD/CD-ROM, using the graphical, mouse-based installation program. The following topics are discussed:
  • Becoming familiar with the installation program's user interface
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​(語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
  • 完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

12.1. 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.
If you would like to use a graphical installation with a system that does not have that capability, such as a partitioned system, you can use VNC or display forwarding. Both the VNC and display forwarding options require an active network during the installation and the use of boot time arguments. For more information on available boot time options, refer to 章 15, IBM Power 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

注意

If you do not wish to use the GUI installation program, the text mode installation program is also available. To start the text mode installation program, use the following command at the yaboot: prompt:
linux text
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation instructions and obtain all needed information.

12.2. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ IBM System i 或​​​​​​​ IBM System 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ IBM System i 或​​​​​​​ IBM System p system 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ System Management Services (SMS) 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ System Management Services GUI 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​聽​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​聲​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 1 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​橫​​​​​​​幅​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 1
SMS 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​

圖形 12.1. SMS 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ SMS 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ Select Boot Options 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Select Install or Boot a Device,再​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ CD/DVD,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​掃​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​ 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ YABOOT 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 或​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​逾​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you are booting via the network, use the images/netboot/ppc64.img file on CD #1.

12.3. Linux 虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

This information only applies to users of non-partitioned System p systems using a video card as their console. Users of partitioned System i and System p systems should skip to 節 12.4, “使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ HMC vterm”.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
These virtual consoles can be helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Messages displayed on the installation or system consoles can help pinpoint a problem. Refer to 表格 12.1, “主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​” for a listing of the virtual consoles, keystrokes used to switch to them, and their contents.
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​(虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ #6),除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

表格 12.1. 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​

主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​ 內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​
1 ctrl+alt+f1 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​
2 ctrl+alt+f2 shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​
3 ctrl+alt+f3 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​)
4 ctrl+alt+f4 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
5 ctrl+alt+f5 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
6 ctrl+alt+f6 X 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

12.4. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ HMC vterm

The HMC vterm is the console for any partitioned IBM System p or IBM System i system. This is opened by right clicking on the partition on the HMC, and then selecting Open Terminal Window. Only a single vterm can be connected to the console at one time and there is no console access for partitioned system besides the vterm. This often is referred to as a 'virtual console', but is different from the virtual consoles in 節 12.3, “Linux 虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​” .

12.5. 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux text mode installation program uses a screen-based interface that includes most of the on-screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces. 圖形 12.2, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, and 圖形 12.3, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, illustrate the screens that appear during the installation process.

注意

文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ GUI 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,LVM(Logical Volume Management)磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ LVM 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

圖形 12.2. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

圖形 12.3. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

  • 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ — 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​)會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​疊​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​;在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​ — 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​亦​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ # 字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Scroll Bar — Scroll bars appear on the side or bottom of a window to control which part of a list or document is currently in the window's frame. The scroll bar makes it easy to move to any part of a file.
  • 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Cursor — Although not a widget, the cursor is used to select (and interact with) a particular widget. As the cursor is moved from widget to widget, it may cause the widget to change color, or the cursor itself may only appear positioned in or next to the widget. In 圖形 12.2, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, the cursor is positioned on the OK button. 圖形 12.3, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, shows the cursor on the Edit button.

12.5.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​

藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 左​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Alt-Tab 來​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To "press" a button, position the cursor over the button (using Tab, for example) and press Space or Enter. To select an item from a list of items, move the cursor to the item you wish to select and press Enter. To select an item with a checkbox, move the cursor to the checkbox and press Space to select an item. To deselect, press Space a second time.
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ F12 接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​;這​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

12.6. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

12.6.1. 從​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD/CD-ROM, place the DVD or CD #1 in your DVD/CD-ROM drive and boot your system from the DVD/CD-ROM.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your CD-ROM drive. It starts by looking for an IDE (also known as an ATAPI) CD-ROM drive.
If your CD-ROM drive is not detected, and it is a SCSI CD-ROM, the installation program prompts you to choose a SCSI driver. Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter. You may specify options for the driver if necessary; however, most drivers detect your SCSI adapter automatically.
If the DVD/CD-ROM drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer will present you with the option to perform a media check on the DVD/CD-ROM. This will take some time, and you may opt to skip over this step. However, if you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media check before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the installation process (refer to 節 12.12, “歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux”).

12.6.1.1. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ IDE CD-ROM 的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,該​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ IDE(ATAPI)DVD/CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​ boot 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux hdX=cdrom。​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ X 改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ master 或​​​​​​​ slave(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​副​​​​​​​):
  • a — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​master
  • b — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​slave
  • c — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​master
  • d — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​slave
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ master 到​​​​​​​ slave 的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.7. 從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

The Select Partition screen applies only if you are installing from a disk partition (that is, if you selected Hard Drive in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog allows you to name the disk partition and directory from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 12.4. 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

Enter the device name of the partition containing the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images. This partition must be formatted with a ext2 or vfat filesystem, and cannot be a logical volume. There is also a field labeled Directory holding images.
If the ISO images are in the root (top-level) directory of a partition, enter a /. If the ISO images are located in a subdirectory of a mounted partition, enter the name of the directory holding the ISO images within that partition. For example, if the partition on which the ISO images is normally mounted as /home/, and the images are in /home/new/, you would enter /new/.
After you have identified the disk partition, the Welcome dialog appears.

12.8. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ TCP/IP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ IP 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ DHCP 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IPv4 或​​​​​​​ IPv6資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ IPv4資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
TCP/IP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 12.5. TCP/IP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

12.9. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ NFS)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ example.com 網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ eastcoast 的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ eastcoast.example.com。​​​​​​​
Next, enter the name of the exported directory. If you followed the setup described in 節 11.5, “準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, you would enter the directory /export/directory/ which contains the variant/ directory.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鏡​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ RedHat 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 12.6. NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.10. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ FTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 12.7. FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/ (可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

12.11. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ HTTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390x)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 12.8. HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

12.12. 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.13. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

Using your mouse, select a language to use for the installation (refer to 圖形 12.9, “選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​”).
您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

圖形 12.9. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.14. 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Using your mouse, select the correct layout type (for example, U.S. English) for the keyboard you would prefer to use for the installation and as the system default (refer to 圖形 12.10, “鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”).
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 12.10. 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

注意

更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-keyboard 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.15. 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

Enter your Installation Number (refer to 圖形 12.11, “Installation Number”). This number will determine the package selection set that is available to the installer. If you choose to skip entering the installation number you will be presented with a basic selection of packages to install later on.
Installation Number

圖形 12.11. Installation Number

12.16. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Partitioning allows you to divide your hard drive into isolated sections, where each section behaves as its own hard drive. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating systems. If you are not sure how you want your system to be partitioned, read 章 25, 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​ for more information.
On this screen you can choose to create the default layout or choose to manual partition using the 'Create custom layout' option of Disk Druid.
自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​握​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
You can configure an iSCSI target for installation, or disable a dmraid device from this screen by clicking on the 'Advanced storage configuration' button. For more information refer to 節 12.17, “進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​”.

警告

Update Agent 會​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /var/spool/up2date/。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /var/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​(3.0 GB 以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 12.12. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​,發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​:
"The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive."
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.17. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

圖形 12.13. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dmraid 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ dmraid 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ iSCSI(SCSI 傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​ TCP/P)。​​​​​​​
To configure an ISCSI target invoke the 'Configure ISCSI Parameters' dialog by selecting 'Add ISCSI target' and clicking on the 'Add Drive' button. Fill in the details for the ISCSI target IP and provide a unique ISCSI initiator name to identify this system. Click the 'Add target' button to attempt connection to the ISCSI target using this information.
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ISCSI 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

圖形 12.14. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ISCSI 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISCSI 目​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​ IP,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ ISCSI 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.18. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ VFAT 或​​​​​​​ NTFS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

    警告

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ VFAT 或​​​​​​​ FAT32 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 12.15. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

[這​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ iSeries 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​]
如​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

If you chose one of the three automatic partitioning options and did not select Review, skip ahead to 節 12.20, “網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​),或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid(一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ LVM(邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you chose to create a custom layout, you must tell the installation program where to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux. This is done by defining mount points for one or more disk partitions in which Red Hat Enterprise Linux is installed.
在​​​​​​​ IBM System p 和​​​​​​​ System i 統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 做​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

圖形 12.16. 在​​​​​​​ IBM System p 和​​​​​​​ System i 統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 做​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Disk Druid。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,Disk Druid 可​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19.1. 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

Disk Druid 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Above the display, you can review the Drive name (such as /dev/hda), the Geom (which shows the hard disk's geometry and consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors as reported by the hard disk), and the Model of the hard drive as detected by the installation program.

12.19.2. Disk Druid's Buttons

These buttons control Disk Druid's actions. They are used to change the attributes of a partition (for example the file system type and mount point) and also to create RAID devices. Buttons on this screen are also used to accept the changes you have made, or to exit Disk Druid. For further explanation, take a look at each button in order:
  • 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屬​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ RAID 來​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ 目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 還​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ 還​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • RAID:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​(redundancy)給​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ RAID,來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • LVM:讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM(Logical Volume Manager)的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​呈​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux System Administration Guide。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ LVM。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ LVM 來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19.3. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • Device: This field displays the partition's device name.
  • Mount Point/RAID/Volume: A mount point is the location within the directory hierarchy at which a volume exists; the volume is "mounted" at this location. This field indicates where the partition is mounted. If a partition exists, but is not set, then you need to define its mount point. Double-click on the partition or click the Edit button.
  • Type: This field shows the partition's file system type (for example, ext2, ext3, or vfat).
  • 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Size (MB): This field shows the partition's size (in MB).
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
隱​​​​​​​藏​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​/LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19.4. 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256 MB) — swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​,電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ swap 類​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 2 GB 為​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:2 GB 以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB 的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​,swap 都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 32 MB。​​​​​​​
    因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ GB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ S = swap 容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​GB為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​),則​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​ 2 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 4 GB(2x2 = 4);而​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 3 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 5 GB(2x2 + (3-2)x1)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 32 GB)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​約​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ PPC PReP 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ — PPC PReP 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​(iSeries 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​ YABOOT 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux)。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ PPC PReP 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
    對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ IBM System i 和​​​​​​​ IBM System p 的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​:PPC PReP 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 4 到​​​​​​​ 8 MB 之​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 10MB。​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(100 MB) — 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/ 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux),以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​(bootstrap) 過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​ PC BIOS 的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 100 MB 的​​​​​​​ boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    警告

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ RAID 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​ 情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​ 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) — this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup, all files (except those stored in /boot) are on the root partition.
    一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 3.0 GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​;而​​​​​​​ 5.0GB 的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19.5. 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

圖形 12.17. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

  • Mount Point: Enter the partition's mount point. For example, if this partition should be the root partition, enter /; enter /boot for the /boot partition, and so on. You can also use the pull-down menu to choose the correct mount point for your partition. For a swap partition the mount point should not be set - setting the filesystem type to swap is sufficient.
  • File System Type: Using the pull-down menu, select the appropriate file system type for this partition. For more information on file system types, refer to 節 12.19.5.1, “檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”.
  • Allowable Drives: This field contains a list of the hard disks installed on your system. If a hard disk's box is highlighted, then a desired partition can be created on that hard disk. If the box is not checked, then the partition will never be created on that hard disk. By using different checkbox settings, you can have Disk Druid place partitions where you need them, or let Disk Druid decide where partitions should go.
  • 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(MB):輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ MB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 100 MB;除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ 100 MB 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Additional Size Options: Choose whether to keep this partition at a fixed size, to allow it to "grow" (fill up the available hard drive space) to a certain point, or to allow it to grow to fill any remaining hard drive space available.
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 填​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ (MB),您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​:一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.19.5.1. 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,基​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​短​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • ext2 — 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ext2 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Unix 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​長​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 255 個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • ext3 — ext3 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ext2 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​優​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​ — 日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(journaling)。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​減​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ fsck,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​降​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​[6] 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ ext3 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ (LVM) — 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,LVM 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ LVM 相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
  • 軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID — 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID(磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​) 章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • swap — Swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​

12.19.6. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If the partition already exists on your disk, you can only change the partition's mount point. To make any other changes, you must delete the partition and recreate it.

12.20. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

If you do not have a network device, physical LAN, or virtual LAN, this screen does not appear during your installation and you should advance to 節 12.21, “時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 12.18. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ DHCP 來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP,手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ DHCP 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 12.19. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​(合​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ DHCP 自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IP 與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DNS 的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-network 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.21. 時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Set your time zone by selecting the city closest to your computer's physical location. Click on the map to zoom in to a particular geographical region of the world.
欲​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​:
  • 藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​城​​​​​​​市​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​黃​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​X表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ UTC 的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC。​​​​​​​

注意

欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-date 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ timeconfig 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.22. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ NT 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ administrator 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ RPMs 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掌​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ - superuser)對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ 只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

圖形 12.20. Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​減​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root,只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,[7] 您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​猜​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​qwerty、​​​​​​​password、​​​​​​​root、​​​​​​​123456 和​​​​​​​ anteater 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​混​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:Aard387vark 或​​​​​​​ 420BMttNT 都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-rootpassword 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

12.23. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ 自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 後​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​(根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 64 位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

圖形 12.21. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

圖形 12.22. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

12.24. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

12.24.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /root/install.log 找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​棄​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​遭​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​破​​​​​​​壞​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To cancel this installation process, press your computer's Reset button or use the Control+Alt+Delete key combination to restart your machine.

12.25. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​

At this point there is nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed. How quickly this happens depends on the number of packages you have selected and your computer's speed.

12.26. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​

恭​​​​​​​喜​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​!您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​!
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​,準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
IBM eServer System p 和​​​​​​​ System i — 正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軔​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux PReP 與​​​​​​​ / 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ LED 的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​燈​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HMC SRC 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ E1F1,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 1 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ System Management Services 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Select Boot Options。​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Select Boot Devices,最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Configure 1st Boot Device。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ SMS 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​,SMS 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
After your computer's normal power-up sequence has completed, YABOOT's prompt appears, at which you can do any of the following things:
  • Press Enter — causes YABOOT's default boot entry to be booted.
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter — 將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ YABOOT 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ iSeries 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Tab 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
  • Do nothing — after YABOOT's timeout period, (by default, five seconds) YABOOT automatically boots the default boot entry.
在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ login: 的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ runlevel(執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​)5 時​​​​​​​(圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​runlevel),您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[6] fsck 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​(metadata)的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ Linux 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
[7] 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 13. IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​

13.1. 為​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

當​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NWSD 的​​​​​​​ IPL 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux dd
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ PCI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

13.1.1. 那​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​甚​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat 所​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​銷​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(NFS)的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 或​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​ SCSI 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

13.1.2. 我​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​?

Driver images can be obtained from several sources. They may be included with Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or they may be available from a hardware or software vendor's website. If you suspect that your system may require one of these drivers, you should create a driver diskette or CD-ROM before beginning your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.

注意

您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux dd 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux dd=url 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ url 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ NFS 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Another option for finding specialized driver information is on Red Hat's website at
在​​​​​​​ 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,Red Hat 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

13.1.3. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For example, to specifically load a driver diskette that you have created, begin the installation process by booting from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 (or using boot media you have created). At the yaboot: prompt enter linux dd. Refer to 章 12, 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ IBM System i 與​​​​​​​ IBM System p 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ for details on booting the installation program.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 14. IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ System p 和​​​​​​​ System i 的​​​​​​​ IBM Online Alert Section。​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/lopdiags/info/LinuxAlerts.html
請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.1. 您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

14.1.1. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ Signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​ 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​signl ll 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​良​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you receive a fatal signal 11 error during your installation, it is probably due to a hardware error in memory on your system's bus. Like other operating systems, Red Hat Enterprise Linux places its own demands on your system's hardware. Some of this hardware may not be able to meet those demands, even if they work properly under another OS.
請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​ Red Hat 最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ errata,以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​係​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ CPU 快​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​ BIOS 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CPU 快​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Re d Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,對​​​​​​​象​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo),輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
	linux mediacheck
需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ signal 11 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​:
	http://www.bitwizard.nl/sig11/

14.2. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

14.2.1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​降​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ frame buffer 的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ nofb 的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.3. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

14.3.1. 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​ 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​ SCSI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Check your hardware vendor's website to determine if a driver diskette image is available that fixes your problem. For more general information on driver diskettes, refer to 章 13, IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​.
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat 硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​

14.3.2. 缺​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​ traceback 訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ traceback 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ scp 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ IBM System p 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​ traceback 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,traceback 錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Alt+F2 切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ tty(虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​scp 訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.3.3. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (節 12.16, “磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.3.4. 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ IBM™ POWER System 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
您​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PPC PReP 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • /boot/分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, do not assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

14.3.5. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ Python 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​ anaconda) 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Python 或​​​​​​​ traceback 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
Traceback (innermost last):
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/iw/progress_gui.py", line 20, in run
rc = self.todo.doInstall ()    
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/todo.py", line 1468, in doInstall 
self.fstab.savePartitions ()    
File "fstab.py", line 221, in savePartitions      
sys.exit(0)  
SystemExit: 0   
Local variables in innermost frame:  
self: <fstab.GuiFstab instance at 8446fe0>  
sys: <module 'sys' (built-in)>  
ToDo object:  (itodo  ToDo  p1  (dp2  S'method'  p3  (iimage  CdromInstallMethod  
p4  (dp5  S'progressWindow'  p6   <failed>
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 的​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ Anaconda 的​​​​​​​ errata。​​​​​​​ Errata 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/
anaconda 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​:
http://rhlinux.redhat.com/anaconda/
You can also search for bug reports related to this problem. To search Red Hat's bug tracking system, go to:
http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 欲​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/apps/activate/

14.4. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

14.4.1. 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ *NWSSTG 進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ IPL

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ *NWSSTG 進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ IPL 時​​​​​​​遭​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​困​​​​​​​難​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PReP 的​​​​​​​ active 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.4.2. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ startx 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ root。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ gedit /etc/inittab 以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ gedit 來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/etc/inittab 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​:
# Default runlevel. The runlevels used by RHS are: 
#   0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#   1 - Single user mode 
#   2 - Multiuser, without NFS (The same as 3, if you do not have networking) 
#   3 - Full multiuser mode 
#   4 - unused 
#   5 - X11 
#   6 - reboot (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#  id:3:initdefault:
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​ id:3:initdefault: 這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 3 為​​​​​​​ 5。​​​​​​​

警告

『​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​』​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​(由​​​​​​​ 3 改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 5)。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
	 id:5:initdefault: 
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Q 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.4.3. X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(GUI)有​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X(X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​),在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ GNOME、​​​​​​​KDE 或​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.4.4. 關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,欠​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
df -h
df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​ df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ -h 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​),請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ df 的​​​​​​​ man page。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,鍵​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ man df 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​,莫​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 100%,或​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 90% 或​​​​​​​ 95% 以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/home/ 與​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​塞​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​;之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X 看​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.4.5. 當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ linux single 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ # 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ passwd root,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ shutdown -r now,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you cannot remember your user account password, you must become root. To become root, type su - and enter your root password when prompted. Then, type passwd <username>. This allows you to enter a new password for the specified user account.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Hardware Compatibility List 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
	http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

14.4.6. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-printer 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

14.4.7. Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ Sendmail 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 或​​​​​​​ Sendmail 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/hosts 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
127.0.0.1  localhost.localdomain  localhost

章 15. IBM Power 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

askmethod
在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd=url
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ NFS 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
display=ip:0
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ IP。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ remotehostname 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​授​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
driverdisk
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ dd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​;
ide=nodma
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DMA,這​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ISO 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)之​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO 與​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​ ISO 影​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mem=xxxm
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 16MB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​百​​​​​​​萬​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ xxx。​​​​​​​
nopass
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nopcmcia
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noprobe
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noshell
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 2 的​​​​​​​ shell 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousb
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ USB 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousbstorage
this command disables the loading of the usbstorage module in the installation program's loader. It may help with device ordering on SCSI systems.
rescue
resolution=
指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​640x480、​​​​​​​800x600、​​​​​​​1024x768 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
serial
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​串​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
text
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ anaconda安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​)軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rhupdates/ 中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vnc
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vncpassword=
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

部 III. IBM System z 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​ –​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​

IBM System z 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​礙​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 16. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​

16.1. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​判​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ IBM eServer System z 平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​仿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ IBM 的​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​皮​​​​​​​書​​​​​​​:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​皮​​​​​​​書​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ IBM eServer System z 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(LPARs)以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​(VMs)。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IBM 資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​拜​​​​​​​訪​​​​​​​ http://www.ibm.com/eserver/zseries/。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD[8] 或​​​​​​​ SCSI[9] 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 2GB 的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​ 需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 5GB 的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  2. 至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ 512 MB 的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 1 GB)供​​​​​​​ Linux 虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 請​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​?雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​)指​​​​​​​派​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ z/VM,並​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ z/VM 來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​(swapping),也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ RAM 的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LPAR 或​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  5. 最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​閱​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​ IBM Linux for System z 紅​​​​​​​皮​​​​​​​書​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 3.3 到​​​​​​​ 3.8 節​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ zSeries 平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LPAR 或​​​​​​​ Linux 虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​(z/VM)。​​​​​​​

16.2. 為​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ System z 硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux System z s支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ CTC(channel-to-channel)、​​​​​​​IUCV(inter-user communication vehicle)、​​​​​​​LCS(LAN channel station)、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ QDIO(Queued Direct I/O)的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​ 4 GB的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 2 GB 的​​​​​​​ DASD、​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IBM System z SCSI LUN)。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​ SCSI (僅​​​​​​​針​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ IBM System z)硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.3. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​

欲​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​(kernel.img)、​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​(ram disk,initrd.img)、​​​​​​​CMS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(redhat.conf)、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ CMS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​(redhat.parm 與​​​​​​​ redhat.conf)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ CMS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,甚​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ IBM System z 後​​​​​​​,網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ssh來​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ script,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​

16.4. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

Make sure an installation CD (or any other type of CD) is not in your hosting partition's drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a CD in the drive may cause unexpected errors.
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /location/of/disk/space。​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 公​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /export/directory。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/location/of/disk/space 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​創​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /var/isos 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/export/directory 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /var/www/html/rhel5。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Linux 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  • 請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​:
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
      dd if=/dev/dvd of=/location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso
      dvd 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ DVD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso
      cdrom 是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​ CD光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​X 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ 1 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.4.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,ISO 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
    在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso /export/directory/diskX/
    將​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ CD-ROM iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /var/isos/disk1.iso /var/www/html/rhel5-install/disk1/
下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ /export/directory 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.4.2. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ iso 或​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ NFS 輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DVD 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
    mv /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/disk*.iso /export/directory/
請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ /etc/exports.這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
/export/directory client.ip.address(ro,no_root_squash)
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​:
/export/directory *(ro,no_root_squash)
啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ NFS 保​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs start指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs reload)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​ NFS 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.5. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

注意

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​ SCSI 來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,僅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ ext2 或​​​​​​​ ext3 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ ext2 或​​​​​​​ ext3(特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ RAID 或​​​​​​​ LVM 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​)之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ — 從​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso 
    dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso
    當​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​達​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​尾​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​–​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​(許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Linux 機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    讓​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ VM 或​​​​​​​ LPAR 上​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ updates.img 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ anaconda 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ anaconda RPM 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ install-methods.txt 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.6. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ z/VM 之​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​

以​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​ guest 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ z/VM,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ x3270 或​​​​​​​ c3270 (來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ x3270-text 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ z/VM,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ S/390 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OS/2 3270 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,Jolly Giant (http://www.jollygiant.com/) 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SSL 的​​​​​​​ 3270 模​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CMS 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
i cms
If necessary, add the device containing z/VM's TCP/IP tools to your CMS disk list. For example:
vmlink tcpmaint 592 592
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ qdio/qeth 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​OSA express 或​​​​​​​ hipersockets),請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ VM guest qioassist 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​:
set qioassist off
請​​​​​​​ FTP 到​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​ (kernel.img 與​​​​​​​ initrd.img) 的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ (如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kernel.img 與​​​​​​​ initrd.img 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​(repl 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​):
  • cd /location/of/boot/images/
  • locsite fix 80
  • bin
  • get kernel.img (repl
  • get initrd.img (repl
  • ascii
  • get generic.prm redhat.parm (repl
  • quit
You may now create the parameter file (for example, redhat.parm). Refer to 章 19, 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ for sample parm files. Below is an explanation of the parm file contents.
參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 32 個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,CMS DASD 上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ DASD 規​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
.parm 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ .parm 檔​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ root=/dev/ram0 ro ip=off ramdisk_size=40000,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ vnc。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CMS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ z/VM 用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ .parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
CMSDASD=191 CMSCONFFILE=redhat.conf
CMSDASD is the device ID of the CMS formatted DASD which contains the configuration file. CMSDASD is often the 'A' DASD (usually disk 191) of the z/VM guest account. The name of the configuration file must be set with CMSCONFFILE and needs to be all lowercase.
The syntax of the CMSCONFFILE is bash style with variable="value" pairs, one on each line.
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ redhat.parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:
root=/dev/ram0 ro ip=off ramdisk_size=40000
CMSDASD=191 CMSCONFFILE=redhat.conf
vnc
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ redhat.exec 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:
/* */                    
'cl rdr'                 
'purge rdr all'          
'spool punch * rdr'      
'PUNCH KERNEL IMG A (NOH'
'PUNCH REDHAT PARM A (NOH'
'PUNCH INITRD IMG A (NOH'
'ch rdr all keep nohold' 
'i 00c'
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ redhat.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:
HOSTNAME="foobar.systemz.example.com"
DASD="200-203"
NETTYPE="qeth"
IPADDR="192.168.17.115"
SUBCHANNELS="0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602"
PORTNAME="FOOBAR"
NETWORK="192.168.17.0"
NETMASK="255.255.255.0"
BROADCAST="192.168.17.255"
SEARCHDNS="example.com:systemz.example.com"
GATEWAY="192.168.17.254"
DNS="192.168.17.1"
MTU="4096"
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​:
  • DASD=dasd-list
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dasd-list 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​ DASD,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ DASD= 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ guest 時​​​​​​​,裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​) 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​穩​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ SAN 的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ LPAR 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ DASD 和​​​​​​​ SCSI 容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​(可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • root=file-system
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ file-system 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​ 根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /dev/ram0, 以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ramdisk。​​​​​​​
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​:
  • SUBCHANNELS=
    為​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​ ID。​​​​​​​
    qeth: SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id, data_device_bus_id"
    lcs: SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id"
    例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​(qeth SUBCHANNEL 敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​):
    SUBCHANNELS=0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​:
  • HOSTNAME=string
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ string 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ Linux guest 的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • NETTYPE=type
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ type 必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:ctc, iucv, lcs, 或​​​​​​​ qeth。​​​​​​​
  • IPADDR=IP
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ Linux guest 的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • NETWORK=network
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ network 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • NETMASK=netmask
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ netmask 為​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • BROADCAST=broadcast
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ broadcast 為​​​​​​​廣​​​​​​​播​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • GATEWAY=gw
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ gw 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ eth 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • MTU=mtu
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ mtu 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​ (MTU)。​​​​​​​
  • DNS=server1:server2::serverN
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ server1:server2::serverN 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​冒​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DNS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
    DNS=10.0.0.1:10.0.0.2
  • SEARCHDNS=domain1:domain2::domainN
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ domain1:domain2::domainN 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​冒​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
    SEARCHDNS=example.com:example.org
  • PORTNAME=osa_portname | lcs_portnumber
    這​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ qdio 或​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OSA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    當​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:osa_portname 是​​​​​​​ OSA裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ qeth 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​PORTNAME 只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ z/VM 4.3,或​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ APAR VM63308 與​​​​​​​ PQ3878的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    當​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:lcs_portnumber 是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,範​​​​​​​圍​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 0 到​​​​​​​ 15。​​​​​​​
  • FCP_n="device_number SCSI_ID WWPN SCSI_LUN FCP_LUN"
    這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP,並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ anaconda 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
    FCP_1="0.0.5000 0x01 0x5105074308c212e9 0x0 4010"
    • n 是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​FCP_1, FCP_2, ...)。​​​​​​​
    • device_number 是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ 0.0.5000 是​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 5000)。​​​​​​​
    • SCSI_ID 是​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​0x01, 0x02 ...),用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ FCP_ 變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • WWPN 是​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​),為​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​0x5105074308c212e9)。​​​​​​​
    • SCSI_LUN 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​呈​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​,多​​​​​​​半​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ 0x00, 0x01, ...),用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ FCP_ 變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • FCP_LUN 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​呈​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​0x4010)。​​​​​​​

    注意

    每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ FCP 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​(FCP_1, FCP_2, ...)都​​​​​​​隨​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​差​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​,由​​​​​​​ FCP 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​:
  • RUNKS=value
    這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ value 定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 1,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 3270 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​ 將​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 0。​​​​​​​
  • cmdline
    在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ cmdline 後​​​​​​​,3270 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​閱​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ unix 形​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​脫​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cmdline 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RUNKS 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​, 在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ z/VM guest ID 登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CMS 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
i cms
請​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​ IPL 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​:
/* */ 'CL RDR' 'PURGE RDR ALL' 'SPOOL PUNCH * RDR' 'PUNCH KERNEL IMG A (NOH' 'PUNCH REDHAT PARM A (NOH' 'PUNCH INITRD IMG A (NOH' 'CH RDR ALL KEEP NOHOLD' 'IPL 00C CLEAR'
初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ DASD 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Once all questions have been answered, you are ready to begin the core installation program, loader. To continue with the installation, refer to 章 17, 在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ for further instructions.

16.7. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux LPAR CD 來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LPAR

當​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LPAR 時​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OS 到​​​​​​​ LPAR 的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Support Element Workplace(SEW)或​​​​​​​ Hardware Master Console(HMC)。​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SYSPROG 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Images 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LPAR。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​側​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​ CPC Recovery 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Load from CD-ROM or Server。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Local CD-ROM,再​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ generic.ins,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.8. 不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ System z 的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ LPAR

  • 以​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OS 到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LPAR 的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Support Element Workplace。​​​​​​​
  • 請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Images,再​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LPAR。​​​​​​​
  • 請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​側​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​ CPC Recovery 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Load from CD-ROM or Server。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ FTP Source,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​:
    主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​:
    您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ ftp.redhat.com
    使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ ID:
    您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ anonymous
    密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​:
    您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ anonymous 來​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​郵​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​)
    帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​:
    請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​
    檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​):
    FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ System z 之​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /pub/redhat/linux/rawhide/s390x
  • 點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ redhat.ins,再​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.9. 在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ LPAR 中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​)

在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ LPAR 圖​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​),請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ LPAR,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ Operating System Messages。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ DASD 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 32 組​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Once all questions have been answered, you are ready to begin the core installation program, loader. To continue with the installation, refer to 章 17, 在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ for further instructions.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

16.10. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

幾​​​​​​​乎​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[8] 直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ DASDs)是​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DASD 上​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,dasda 中​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ dasda[123]。​​​​​​​
[9] SCSI LUN 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ zFCP的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​纖​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 17. 在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

This chapter explains how to perform a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation using the graphical, mouse-based installation program. The following topics are discussed:
  • Becoming familiar with the installation program's user interface
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​(語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
  • 完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

17.1. 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.

注意

文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ GUI 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,LVM(Logical Volume Management)磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ LVM 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.2. 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux text mode installation program uses a screen-based interface that includes most of the on-screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces. 圖形 17.1, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, and 圖形 17.2, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, illustrate the screens that appear during the installation process.

注意

文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ GUI 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,LVM(Logical Volume Management)磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ LVM 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

圖形 17.1. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

圖形 17.2. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

  • 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ — 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​)會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​疊​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​;在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​ — 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​亦​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ # 字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​軸​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Scroll Bar — Scroll bars appear on the side or bottom of a window to control which part of a list or document is currently in the window's frame. The scroll bar makes it easy to move to any part of a file.
  • 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Cursor — Although not a widget, the cursor is used to select (and interact with) a particular widget. As the cursor is moved from widget to widget, it may cause the widget to change color, or the cursor itself may only appear positioned in or next to the widget. In 圖形 17.1, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, the cursor is positioned on the OK button. 圖形 17.2, “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, shows the cursor on the Edit button.

17.2.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​

藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 左​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​ 方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 與​​​​​​​ Alt-Tab 來​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​游​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To "press" a button, position the cursor over the button (using Tab, for example) and press Space or Enter. To select an item from a list of items, move the cursor to the item you wish to select and press Enter. To select an item with a checkbox, move the cursor to the checkbox and press Space to select an item. To deselect, press Space a second time.
按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ F12 接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​;這​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

17.3. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

After following the steps outlined in 章 16, 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​ for booting an LPAR or VM system, ssh to the configured Linux install system on the IBM System z.
雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ VM 與​​​​​​​ LPAR 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​慢​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​喜​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ DISPLAY= 變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​ 他​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ VNC 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​ X11 forwarding 的​​​​​​​ SSH 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ Telnet 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​ X 與​​​​​​​ VNC 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SSH。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ z/VM 上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SSH 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X11 forwarding。​​​​​​​

17.3.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X11 Forwarding 進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Linux 工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ X11 Forwarding 的​​​​​​​ OpenSSH 來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
ssh -X linuxvm.example.com
-X 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X11 forwarding。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DNS 或​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DISPLAY= 變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​ DISPLAY=workstationname:0.0 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Linux Image 的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ workstationname。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ xhost +linuxvm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​ parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DISPLAY= 變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ VM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ X11 forwarded 的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.3.2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ VNC 進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ VNC,在​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SSH 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ VNC 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​ 視​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ VNC 的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ SSH 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ VNC 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 器​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Linux 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,loader 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ loader 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.4. 從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(DASD)

The Select Partition screen applies only if you are installing from a disk partition (that is, if you selected Hard Drive in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog allows you to name the disk partition and directory from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
Enter the device name of the partition containing the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images. This partition must be formatted with a ext2 or vfat filesystem, and cannot be a logical volume. There is also a field labeled Directory holding images.
If the ISO images are in the root (top-level) directory of a partition, enter a /. If the ISO images are located in a subdirectory of a mounted partition, enter the name of the directory holding the ISO images within that partition. For example, if the partition on which the ISO images is normally mounted as /home/, and the images are in /home/new/, you would enter /new/.
After you have identified the disk partition, the Welcome dialog appears.

17.5. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ NFS)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ example.com 網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ eastcoast 的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ eastcoast.example.com。​​​​​​​
Next, enter the name of the exported directory. If you followed the setup described in 節 16.4, “準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​”, you would enter the directory /export/directory/.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鏡​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ RedHat 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 17.3. NFS 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.6. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ FTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 17.4. FTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/ (可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

17.7. 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP 對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ HTTP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ variant/ 所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/RedHat/,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ arch/,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ i386, ia64, ppc 或​​​​​​​ s390x)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

圖形 17.5. HTTP 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​

接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ loopback 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

17.8. 歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​ 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.9. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

Using your mouse, select a language to use for the installation (refer to 圖形 17.6, “選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​”).
您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

圖形 17.6. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.10. 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

Enter your Installation Number (refer to 圖形 17.7, “Installation Number”). This number will determine the package selection set that is available to the installer. If you choose to skip entering the installation number you will be presented with a basic selection of packages to install later on.
Installation Number

圖形 17.7. Installation Number

17.11. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​駐​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /home 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
On this screen you can choose to create the default layout or choose to manual partition using the 'Create custom layout' option of Disk Druid.
自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​握​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
You can configure an zFCP LUN for installation, or disable a dmraid device from this screen by clicking on the 'Advanced storage configuration' button. For more information refer to 節 17.12, “進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​”.

警告

Update Agent 會​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /var/spool/up2date/。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /var/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​(3.0 GB 以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​納​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 17.8. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​,發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​:
"The partition table on device dasda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive."
您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.12. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

17.12.1. FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

FCP光​​​​​​​纖​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​)裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ IBM System z 能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​FCP光​​​​​​​纖​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​)裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​纖​​​​​​​布​​​​​​​局​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ zSeries 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ SCSI LUNs 作​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​;但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 中​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ FCP(光​​​​​​​纖​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,Fibre Channel Protocol)的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,好​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​盡​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ zFCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
每​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

圖形 17.9. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

To configure a Fiber Channel Protocol SCSI device invoke the 'Add FCP device' dialog by selecting 'Add ZFCP LUN' and clicking on the 'Add Drive' button. Fill in the details for the 16 bit device number, 64 bit World Wide Port Number (WWPN) and 64 bit FCP LUN. Click the 'Add' button to attempt connection to the FCP device using this information.
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

圖形 17.10. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​Disk Druid 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

圖形 17.11. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

The installer requires that at least one ECKD DASD be defined. In the situation where a SCSI-only installation is desired a DASD= parameter should be entered into the CMS conf file with a non-existent device number. This will satisfy Anaconda's requirement for a defined ECKD DASD, while resulting in a SCSI-only environment.

17.13. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​z/VM 或​​​​​​​ z/OS)。​​​​​​​

    警告

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 和​​​​​​​ SCSI 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ VFAT 或​​​​​​​ FAT32 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ — 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 17.12. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

If you chose to create a custom layout, you must tell the installation program where to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux. This is done by defining mount points for one or more disk partitions in which Red Hat Enterprise Linux is installed.
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 做​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

圖形 17.13. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 做​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Disk Druid。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,Disk Druid 可​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14.1. DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

Disk Druid 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Above the display, you can review the Drive name (such as /dev/dasda), the Geom (which shows the hard disk's geometry and consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors as reported by the hard disk), and the Model of the hard drive as detected by the installation program.
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ /boot 連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ ipl 既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14.2. Disk Druid's Buttons

These buttons control Disk Druid's actions. They are used to change the attributes of a partition (for example the file system type and mount point) and also to create RAID devices. Buttons on this screen are also used to accept the changes you have made, or to exit Disk Druid. For further explanation, take a look at each button in order:
  • 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屬​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • RAID:使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​(redundancy)給​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ RAID,來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14.3. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • Device: This field displays the partition's device name.
  • Mount Point/RAID/Volume: A mount point is the location within the directory hierarchy at which a volume exists; the volume is "mounted" at this location. This field indicates where the partition is mounted. If a partition exists, but is not set, then you need to define its mount point. Double-click on the partition or click the Edit button.
  • Type: This field shows the partition's file system type (for example, ext2, ext3, or vfat).
  • 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Size (MB): This field shows the partition's size (in MB).
  • 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​:這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
隱​​​​​​​藏​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​/LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ LVM 磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14.4. 建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256 MB) — swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​,電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​搭​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ swap 類​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 這​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 2 GB 為​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:2 GB 以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 2 GB 的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​,swap 都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 32 MB。​​​​​​​
    因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ GB 為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ S = swap 容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​GB為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​),則​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    依​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​ 2 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 4 GB(2x2 = 4);而​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 3 GB 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,swap 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 5 GB(2x2 + (3-2)x1)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ 32 GB)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​約​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(100 MB) — 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /boot/,並​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​(讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux)與​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ext3 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,100 MB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.14.5. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​雙​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If the partition already exists on your disk, you can only change the partition's mount point. To make any other changes, you must delete the partition and recreate it.

17.15. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

If you do not have a network device, this screen does not appear during your installation and you should advance to 節 17.16, “時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 17.14. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ DHCP 來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP,手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ DHCP 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ OSA layer 3 的​​​​​​​ qdio/qeth 選​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP。​​​​​​​Layer 3 不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ MAC 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​(ARP)功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

圖形 17.15. 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​(合​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ DHCP 自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IP 與​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DNS 的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.16. 時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Set your time zone by selecting the city closest to your computer's physical location. Click on the map to zoom in to a particular geographical region of the world.
欲​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​:
  • 藉​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​城​​​​​​​市​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​黃​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​紅​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​X表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​捲​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ UTC 的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC。​​​​​​​

注意

欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-date 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ timeconfig 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.17. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​ NT 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ administrator 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ RPMs 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掌​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ - superuser)對​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ 只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

圖形 17.16. Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​減​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ root,只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su - 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 鍵​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,[10] 您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​輕​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​猜​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​qwerty、​​​​​​​password、​​​​​​​root、​​​​​​​123456 和​​​​​​​ anteater 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​混​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:Aard387vark 或​​​​​​​ 420BMttNT 都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-rootpassword 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Root Password Tool。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.18. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ 自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 後​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​(根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ zSeries 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 31 位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​, 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

圖形 17.17. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​

選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​藉​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

圖形 17.18. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​

17.19. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

17.19.1. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /root/install.log 找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​棄​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​遭​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​破​​​​​​​壞​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​ SSH session 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 3270 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ IPL 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

17.20. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​

At this point there is nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed. How quickly this happens depends on the number of packages you have selected and your computer's speed.

17.21. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​

恭​​​​​​​喜​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​!您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​!
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​,準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 於​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 上​​​​​​​ IPL(啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 200 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dsad,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ #cp i 200 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​(清​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​ DASD 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ dasd (dasda)為​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ z/VM 訪​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /boot 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ WWPN 和​​​​​​​ LUN 資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​ zFCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​ ipl。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,
#CP SET LOADDEV PORTNAME 50050763 FCCD9689 LUN 83030000 00000000
可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ zFCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(0x50050763FCCD9689 為​​​​​​​ WWPN 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,8303 為​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN)一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ zFCP 路​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​, zFCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ IPL。​​​​​​​
#cp q v fcp
在​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ zFCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 4322)可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​ ipl,指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
#cp ipl 4322
以​​​​​​​ LPAR 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,HMC 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ LPAR 發​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,指​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 或​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ zFCP WWPN。​​​​​​​

注意

對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ z/VM 的​​​​​​​訪​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​,假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Linux 訪​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ #cp disc 而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ #cp logout 或​​​​​​​ #cp log。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ 3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ IBM System z。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ IPL(開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​)安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ ssh 登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 3270 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/securetty 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ runlevel(執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​)5 時​​​​​​​(圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​runlevel),您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[10] 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ root 帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 18. 移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ S/390 中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ VM 中​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ DASD 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​ 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 19. 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​

IThe IBM System z 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,好​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(anaconda)啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 32 個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​天​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CMS DASD 上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ DASD 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​.parm 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​真​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ root=/dev/ram0 ro ip=off ramdisk_size=40000,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ vnc。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​,兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ .parm 中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​;這​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ CMSDASD 與​​​​​​​ CMSCONF。​​​​​​​
CMSDASD=cmsdasd_address
Where cmsdasd_address represents the list of the device ID of the CMS DASD device which contains the configuration file. This is usually the CMS user's 'A' disk. This option is applicable only for users who have a CMS formatted disk (z/VM) available.
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:CMSDASD=191
CMSCONFFILE=configuration_file
在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,configuration_file 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​ Linux 檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​CMS 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ REDHAT CONF 則​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ redhat.conf。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ CMS 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​(z/VM)的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:CMSCONFFILE=redhat.conf
DASD=dasd-list
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ dasd-list 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​ DASD;但​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ DASD= 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:DASD=0.0.0100,0.0201-0.0.0204
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​:
SUBCHANNELS=
為​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​ ID。​​​​​​​
qeth: SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,
      data_device_bus_id"
lcs: SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id"
Due to the length of the qeth command line, it has been broken into two lines.

注意

CTC 與​​​​​​​ NETIUCV 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​(qeth SUBCHANNEL 敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​):
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​:
HOSTNAME=string
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ string 是​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Linux 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NETTYPE=type
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ type 必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​:qeth 或​​​​​​​ lcs。​​​​​​​
IPADDR=IP
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ IP 是​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Linux 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NETWORK=network
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ network 是​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NETMASK=netmask
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ netmask 是​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
BROADCAST=broadcast
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ broadcast 是​​​​​​​廣​​​​​​​播​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GATEWAY=gw
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ network 是​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
MTU=mtu
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ mtu 是​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​(MTU,Maximum Transmission Unit)。​​​​​​​
DNS=server1:server2:additional_server_terms:serverN
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ server1:server2:additional_server_terms:serverN 是​​​​​​​ DNS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​冒​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
DNS=10.0.0.1:10.0.0.2
SEARCHDNS=domain1:domain2:additional_dns_terms:domainN
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ domain1:domain2:additional_dns_terms:domainN 是​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​冒​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
SEARCHDNS=example.com:example.org
PORTNAME=osa_portname | lcs_portnumber
這​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​ OSA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:osa_portname 是​​​​​​​ OSA裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ qeth 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​PORTNAME 只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ z/VM 4.3,或​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ APAR VM63308 與​​​​​​​ PQ3878的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ qdio 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:lcs_portnumber 是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,範​​​​​​​圍​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 0 到​​​​​​​ 15。​​​​​​​
FCP_* (FCP_1, FCP_2, ...)
在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ FCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ FCP(您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,作​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​:
root=/dev/ram0 DASD=200

注意

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ QETH 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​:
redhat.parm 檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
root=/dev/ram0 ro ip=off ramdisk_size=40000
CMSDASD=191 CMSCONFFILE=redhat.conf
vnc
redhat.conf 檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​(redhat.parm 中​​​​​​​ CMSCONFFILE 所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​)
DASD=200
HOSTNAME="foobar.systemz.example.com"
DASD="200-203"
NETTYPE="qeth"
IPADDR="192.168.17.115"
SUBCHANNELS="0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602"
PORTNAME="FOOBAR"
NETWORK="192.168.17.0"
NETMASK="255.255.255.0"
BROADCAST="192.168.17.255"
SEARCHDNS="example.com:systemz.example.com"
GATEWAY="192.168.17.254"
DNS="192.168.17.1"
MTU="4096"

章 20. 額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​

askmethod
在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd=url
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ NFS 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
display=ip:0
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ IP。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname,這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ remotehostname 就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​授​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ISO 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)之​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ ISO 與​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 等​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​ ISO 影​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noprobe
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
rescue
text
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vnc
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vncpassword=
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ VNC 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noipv6
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Ipv6 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Ipv6 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ Ivp6 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
cmdline
3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 時​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​)無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ unix 式​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 非​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​談​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ anaconda 的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 3270 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​佳​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​普​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​談​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
RUNKS=1
此​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ cmdline 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​)在​​​​​​​ IBM System z 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kick start 非​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​談​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 21. IBM System z 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

21.1. 您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

21.1.1. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ Signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

signal 11 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​ 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​signl ll 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​良​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

21.2. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

21.2.1. 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 之​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

If you receive an error message stating No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, then there may be an issue with your DASD devices. If you encounter this error, add the DASD=<disks> parameter to your parm file (where disks is the DASD range reserved for installation) and start the install again.
除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux root shell 中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dasdfmt 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ DASD,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CMS 來​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ DASD。​​​​​​​

21.2.2. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (節 17.11, “磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

21.2.3. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
您​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /(root)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, do not assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

21.2.4. 您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ Python 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?

在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​ anaconda) 也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Python 或​​​​​​​ traceback 的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
Traceback (innermost last):
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/iw/progress_gui.py", line 20, in run
rc = self.todo.doInstall ()    
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/todo.py", line 1468, in doInstall 
self.fstab.savePartitions ()    
File "fstab.py", line 221, in savePartitions      
sys.exit(0)  
SystemExit: 0   
Local variables in innermost frame:  
self: <fstab.GuiFstab instance at 8446fe0>  
sys: <module 'sys' (built-in)>  
ToDo object:  (itodo  ToDo  p1  (dp2  S'method'  p3  (iimage  CdromInstallMethod  
p4  (dp5  S'progressWindow'  p6   <failed>
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 的​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ Anaconda 的​​​​​​​ errata。​​​​​​​ Errata 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/
anaconda 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​幫​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​:
http://rhlinux.redhat.com/anaconda/
You can also search for bug reports related to this problem. To search Red Hat's bug tracking system, go to:
http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​繫​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 欲​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/apps/activate/

21.3. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

21.3.1. 遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ XDMCP

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​ 啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X Display Manager Control Protocol (XDMCP)。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ X 終​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​)遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ XDMCP 的​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ vi 或​​​​​​​ nano 等​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /etc/X11/gdm/gdm-config 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
[xdmcp]

Enable=false
請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ Enable=true,儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 5 以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
/sbin/init 5
從​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X 的​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​ X 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​:
X :1 -query s390vm.example.com
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ XDMCP 連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ s390vm.example.com),並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ :1 (可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Ctrl-Alt-F8 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​ 組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​)顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​巢​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​(nested) X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Xnest 允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​巢​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ Xnest,以​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​ X 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ s390vm.example.com
Xnest :1 -query s390vm.example.com

21.3.2. 當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ linux single 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​ # 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ passwd root,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ shutdown -r now,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you cannot remember your user account password, you must become root. To become root, type su - and enter your root password when prompted. Then, type passwd <username>. This allows you to enter a new password for the specified user account.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Hardware Compatibility List 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
	http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

21.3.3. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​shell提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-printer 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 印​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

21.3.4. Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ Sendmail 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Apache 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ httpd 或​​​​​​​ Sendmail 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/hosts 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
127.0.0.1  localhost.localdomain  localhost

章 22. 給​​​​​​​ IBM System z 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

22.1. sysfs 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

Linux 2.6 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ sysfs 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​proc、​​​​​​​devfs、​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ devpty 的​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​sysfs 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​,整​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ user space(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​)存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​sysfs 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /proc/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ devfs 所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​早​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ sysfs 中​​​​​​​,許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​老​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ proc 項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​;但​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​走​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ sysfs。​​​​​​​
sysfs 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /sys/ 之​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/sysfs/ 子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​:
  1. /devices/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​
    這​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ /css0/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​(subchannel)。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 0.0.nnnn 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ nnnn 是​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ 0000 到​​​​​​​ ffff。​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​真​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 0.0.xxxx,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ xxxx 是​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/devices/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. /bus/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​
    這​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ /ccw/ 與​​​​​​​ /ccwgroup/ 子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​CCW 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/ccw/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​佔​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​CCW 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ 3390-3 DASD 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​;而​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​ OSA 介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​ QDIO 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​,卻​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/ccw/ 與​​​​​​​ /ccwgroup/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
    /devices/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ /sys/devices/css0/ 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​(symbolic link)。​​​​​​​
    /drivers/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​dasd、​​​​​​​console、​​​​​​​qeth 與​​​​​​​ zfcp 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/driver/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​(位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /sys/devices/css0/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  3. /class/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​
    其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​質​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ ttys、​​​​​​​SCSI 磁​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​雜​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​,放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. /block/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​
    這​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,分​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ block device(區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​):大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ DASD、​​​​​​​loopback 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID block device 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​拿​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​早​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ sysfs 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​,後​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ sysfs 名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 2.4 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​,zFCP 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​;但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 2.6 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 0.0.1600 傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

22.2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ zFCP 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ SCSI/FCP 資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ /etc/zfcp.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ SCSI 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ alias scsi_hostadapter zFCP。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ zFCP模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# cat /etc/zfcp.conf
0.0.010a 0x01 0x5005076300c18154 0x00 0x5719000000000000

# cat /etc/modprobe.conf
alias eth0 qeth
options dasd_mod dasd=201,4b2e
alias scsi_hostadapter zfcp
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​ SCSI 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​妨​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
# cd /lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/kernel/drivers/s390/scsi
# modprobe zfcp

# lsmod
Module                  Size  Used by
zfcp                  221460  0 [permanent]
autofs4                39944  0
qeth                  166288  0
qdio                   60240  3 zfcp,qeth
ccwgroup               25344  1 qeth
ipt_REJECT             23552  1
ipt_state              18944  5
ip_conntrack           57904  1 ipt_state
iptable_filter         19712  1
ip_tables              37888  3 ipt_REJECT,ipt_state,iptable_filter
sd_mod                 39688  0
scsi_mod              182904  2 zfcp,sd_mod
dm_mod                 86408  0
ext3                  179056  2
jbd                    92720  1 ext3
dasd_fba_mod           25344  0
dasd_eckd_mod          77056  4
dasd_mod               85328  6 dasd_fba_mod,dasd_eckd_mod

# cd /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a

# echo 1 > online
# cat online
1

# echo 0x5005076300c18154 > /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a/port_add
# ls
0x5005076300c18154  failed            lic_version    s_id
availability        fc_link_speed     nameserver     status
card_version        fc_service_class  online         wwnn
cmb_enable          fc_topology       port_add       wwpn
cutype              hardware_version  port_remove
detach_state        host2             scsi_host_no
devtype             in_recovery       serial_number

# cd /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a/0x5005076300c18154
# echo 0x5719000000000000 > unit_add
# ls
0x5719000000000000  d_id    in_recovery  status    unit_remove
detach_state        failed  scsi_id      unit_add  wwnn

# cat /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a/scsi_host_no
0x0
# cat /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a/0x5005076300c18154/scsi_id
0x1
# cat \
/sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.010a/0x5005076300c18154/0x5719000000000000/scsi_lun
0x0

# cat /sys/bus/scsi/devices/0\:0\:1\:0/hba_id
0.0.010a
# cat /sys/bus/scsi/devices/0\:0\:1\:0/wwpn
0x5005076300c18154
# cat /sys/bus/scsi/devices/0\:0\:1\:0/fcp_lun
0x5719000000000000

# cat /sys/bus/scsi/devices/0\:0\:1\:0/block/dev
8:0
# cat /sys/bus/scsi/devices/0\:0\:1\:0/block/sda1/dev
8:1

# cat /proc/scsi/scsi
Attached devices:
Host: scsi2 Channel: 00 Id: 01 Lun: 00
  Vendor: IBM      Model: 2105F20          Rev: .123
  Type:   Direct-Access                    ANSI SCSI revision: 03

# fdisk /dev/sda

# mke2fs -j /dev/sda1

# mount /dev/sda1 /mnt
# df
Filesystem           1K-blocks      Used Available Use% Mounted on
/dev/dasda1            2344224   1427948    797196  65% /
none                    511652         0    511652   0% /dev/shm
/dev/dasdb1            2365444     32828   2212456   2% /opt
/dev/sda1              3844088     32828   3615988   1% /mnt

# cd /boot
# mv initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img.orig
# mkinitrd -v --with=scsi_mod --with=zfcp --with=sd_mod initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img 2.6.7-1.451.2.3
Looking for deps of module ide-disk
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_eckd_mod         dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_fba_mod  dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module ext3  jbd
Looking for deps of module jbd
Looking for deps of module scsi_mod
Looking for deps of module zfcp  qdio scsi_mod
Looking for deps of module qdio
Looking for deps of module scsi_mod
Looking for deps of module sd_mod        scsi_mod
Looking for deps of module scsi_mod
Using modules:  ./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_mod.ko
./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_eckd_mod.ko
./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_fba_mod.ko ./kernel/fs/jbd/jbd.ko
./kernel/fs/ext3/ext3.ko ./kernel/drivers/scsi/scsi_mod.ko
./kernel/drivers/s390/cio/qdio.ko ./kernel/drivers/s390/scsi/zfcp.ko
./kernel/drivers/scsi/sd_mod.ko
Using loopback device /dev/loop0
/sbin/nash -> /tmp/initrd.cT1534/bin/nash
/sbin/insmod.static -> /tmp/initrd.cT1534/bin/insmod
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_mod.ko'-> 
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/dasd_mod.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_eckd_mod.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/dasd_eckd_mod.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_fba_mod.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/dasd_fba_mod.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/fs/jbd/jbd.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/jbd.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/fs/ext3/ext3.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/ext3.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/scsi/scsi_mod.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/scsi_mod.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/cio/qdio.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/qdio.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/scsi/zfcp.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/zfcp.ko'
`/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/scsi/sd_mod.ko' ->
`/tmp/initrd.cT1534/lib/sd_mod.ko'
...
Loading module dasd_mod with options dasd=201,4b2e
Loading module dasd_eckd_mod
Loading module dasd_fba_mod
Loading module jbd
Loading module ext3
Loading module scsi_mod
Loading module qdio
Loading module zfcp
Loading module sd_mod

# zipl -V
Using config file '/etc/zipl.conf'
Target device information
  Device..........................: 5e:00
  Partition.......................: 5e:01
  Device name.....................: dasda
  DASD device number..............: 0201
  Type............................: disk partition
  Disk layout.....................: ECKD/compatible disk layout
  Geometry - heads................: 15
  Geometry - sectors..............: 12
  Geometry - cylinders............: 3308
  Geometry - start................: 24
  File system block size..........: 4096
  Physical block size.............: 4096
  Device size in physical blocks..: 595416
Building bootmap '/boot//bootmap'
Building menu 'rh-automatic-menu'
Adding #1: IPL section 'linux' (default)
  kernel image......: /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.7-1.451.2.3 at 0x10000
  kernel parmline...: 'root=LABEL=/' at 0x1000
  initial ramdisk...: /boot/initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img at 0x800000
Preparing boot device: dasda (0201).
Preparing boot menu
  Interactive prompt......: disabled
  Menu timeout............: disabled
  Default configuration...: 'linux'
Syncing disks...
Done.

22.3. 利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ RAID 類​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​(Multipath)的​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

跟​​​​​​​ raidtools 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​,mdadm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​訴​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​:
  • 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​
  • 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​(multipath)裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

22.3.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/mdadm.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DEVICE 與​​​​​​​ ARRAY 值​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
DEVICE /dev/sd[abcd]1
ARRAY /dev/md0 devices=/dev/sda1,/dev/sdb1,/dev/sdc1,/dev/sdd1
在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,DEVICE 一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ glob 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ glob(7) man page 獲​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​),以​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
  • /dev/sda1
  • /dev/sdb1
  • /dev/sdc1
  • /dev/sdd1
而​​​​​​​ ARRAY 一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ DEVICE 行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,組​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(/dev/md0)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,/proc/mdstat 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​:
Personalities :
read_ahead not set
Event: 0
unused devices: none
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ mdadm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 0 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​:
mdadm -C /dev/md0 --level=raid0 --raid-devices=4 /dev/sda1 /dev/sdb1 /dev/sdc1 \
/dev/sdd1
Continue creating array? yes
mdadm: array /dev/md0 started.
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​隨​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,獲​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm --detail /dev/md0 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
/dev/md0:
Version : 00.90.00
Creation Time : Mon Mar  1 13:49:10 2004
Raid Level : raid0
Array Size : 15621632 (14.90 GiB 15.100 GB)
Raid Devices : 4
Total Devices : 4
Preferred Minor : 0
Persistence : Superblock is persistent

Update Time : Mon Mar  1 13:49:10 2004
State : dirty, no-errors
Active Devices : 4
Working Devices : 4
Failed Devices : 0
Spare Devices : 0

Chunk Size : 64K

      Number   Major   Minor   RaidDevice State
         0       8        1        0      active sync   /dev/sda1
         1       8       17        1      active sync   /dev/sdb1
         2       8       33        2      active sync   /dev/sdc1
         3       8       49        3      active sync   /dev/sdd1
           UUID : 25c0f2a1:e882dfc0:c0fe135e:6940d932
         Events : 0.1

22.3.2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​(multipath)裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

In addition to creating RAID arrays, mdadm can also be used to take advantage of hardware supporting more than one I/O path to individual SCSI LUNs (disk drives). The goal of multipath storage is continued data availability in the event of hardware failure or individual path saturation. Because this configuration contains multiple paths (each acting as an independent virtual controller) accessing a common SCSI LUN (disk drive), the Linux kernel detects each shared drive once "through" each path. In other words, the SCSI LUN (disk drive) known as /dev/sda may also be accessible as /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, and so on, depending on the specific configuration.
要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ I/O 路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​飽​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​,mdadm 為​​​​​​​ level 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​ multipath 會​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ md 層​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​ I/O 路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​ I/O 需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/mdadm.conf 檔​​​​​​​,定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​ DEVICE 與​​​​​​​ ARRAY 兩​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

跟​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ RAID 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /etc/mdadm.conf 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​),這​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​;不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ RAID 等​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ multipath 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​:
mdadm -C /dev/md0 --level=multipath --raid-devices=4 /dev/sda1 /dev/sdb1  
 /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdd1
Continue creating array? yes
mdadm: array /dev/md0 started.
Due to the length of the mdadm command line, it has been broken into two lines.
在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ SCSI LUN 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ /dev/md0 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ /dev/md0 的​​​​​​​ I/O 都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /dev/sda1、​​​​​​​/dev/sdb1、​​​​​​​/dev/sdc1、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ /dev/sdd1 (視​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ mdadm --detail /dev/md0 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,查​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​ /dev/md0 的​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
/dev/md0:
Version : 00.90.00
Creation Time : Tue Mar  2 10:56:37 2004
Raid Level : multipath
Array Size : 3905408 (3.72 GiB 3.100 GB)
Raid Devices : 1
Total Devices : 4
Preferred Minor : 0
Persistence : Superblock is persistent

Update Time : Tue Mar  2 10:56:37 2004
State : dirty, no-errors
Active Devices : 1
Working Devices : 4
Failed Devices : 0
Spare Devices : 3

    Number   Major   Minor   RaidDevice State
       0       8       49        0      active sync   /dev/sdd1
       1       8       17        1      spare   /dev/sdb1
       2       8       33        2      spare   /dev/sdc1
       3       8        1        3      spare   /dev/sda1
           UUID : 4b564608:fa01c716:550bd8ff:735d92dc
         Events : 0.1
另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ mdadm 的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,強​​​​​​​迫​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ RAID 陣​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​皆​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,/dev/sda1 已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ I/O 活​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​衝​​​​​​​擊​​​​​​​:
# mdadm /dev/md0 -f /dev/sda1
mdadm: set /dev/sda1 faulty in /dev/md0
# mdadm /dev/md0 -r /dev/sda1
mdadm: hot removed /dev/sda1
# mdadm /dev/md0 -a /dev/sda1
mdadm: hot added /dev/sda1
#

22.4. 從​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ IPL

Anaconda(安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)能​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ z/VM 中​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ SCSI 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

22.4.1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SET LOADDEV 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ WWPN 與​​​​​​​ LUN 給​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
#cp set loaddev portname 50050763 00c18154 lun 57190000 00000000
Ready; T=0.01/0.01 15:47:53
q loaddev
PORTNAME 50050763 00C18154    LUN  57190000 00000000    BOOTPROG 0
BR_LBA   00000000 00000000
Ready; T=0.01/0.01 15:47:56
把​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DCP 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
q fcp
00: FCP  010A ON FCP   010ACHPID C1 SUBCHANNEL = 0000
00:      010A QDIO-ELIGIBLE       QIOASSIST-ELIGIBLE
Ready; T=0.01/0.01 15:51:29

i 010a
00: I 010A
00: HCPLDI2816I Acquiring the machine loader from the processor
controller.
00: HCPLDI2817I Load completed from the processor controller.
00: HCPLDI2817I Now starting machine loader version 0001.
01: HCPGSP2630I The virtual machine is placed in CP mode due to a SIGP
stop and
store status from CPU 00.
00: MLOEVL012I: Machine loader up and running (version 0.13).
00: MLOPDM003I: Machine loader finished, moving data to final storage
location.
Linux version 2.6.7-1.451.2.3 (bhcompile@example.z900.redhat.com) (gcc
version 3.4
.1 20040702 (Red Hat Linux 3.4.1-2)) #1 SMP Wed Jul 14 17:52:22 EDT 2004
We are running under VM (64 bit mode)

注意

由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​截​​​​​​​稿​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​係​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

22.5. 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ DASD

底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ DASD volume 的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:

注意

請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ VM 下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
CP LINK RHEL4X 4B2E 4B2E MR
DASD 4B2E LINKED R/W
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​ volume 的​​​​​​​ /sys/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
# cd /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/dasd-eckd/0.0.4b2e/
# ls -l
total 0
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 availability
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 cmb_enable
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 cutype
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 detach_state
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 devtype
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 discipline
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 online
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 readonly
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 use_diag
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
# cat online
0
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
# echo 1 > online
# cat online
1
檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ devnode 所​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​:
# ls -l
total 0
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 availability
lrwxrwxrwx  1 root root    0 Aug 25 17:07 block -> ../../../../block/dasdb
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 cmb_enable
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 cutype
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 detach_state
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 devtype
-r--r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 discipline
-rw-r--r--  1 root root    0 Aug 25 17:04 online
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 readonly
-rw-r--r--  1 root root 4096 Aug 25 17:04 use_diag
如​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,4B2E 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ /dev/dasdb 為​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /root目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​:
# cd
# dasdfmt -b 4096 -d cdl -f /dev/dasdb -l LX4B2E -p -y

cyl    97 of  3338 |#----------------------------------------------|   2%
當​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​,格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ fdasd 將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​:
# fdasd -a /dev/dasdb
auto-creating one partition for the whole disk...
writing volume label...
writing VTOC...
checking !
wrote NATIVE!
rereading partition table...
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
# mke2fs -j /dev/dasdb1
mke2fs 1.35 (28-Feb-2004)
Filesystem label=
OS type: Linux
Block size=4096 (log=2)
Fragment size=4096 (log=2)
300960 inodes, 600816 blocks
30040 blocks (5.00%) reserved for the super user
First data block=0
19 block groups
32768 blocks per group, 32768 fragments per group
15840 inodes per group
Superblock backups stored on blocks:
        32768, 98304, 163840, 229376, 294912

Writing inode tables: done
Creating journal (8192 blocks): done
Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done

This filesystem will be automatically checked every 39 mounts or
180 days, whichever comes first.  Use tune2fs -c or -i to override.
掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
# mount /dev/dasdb1 /opt
# mount
/dev/dasda1 on / type ext3 (rw)
none on /proc type proc (rw)
none on /sys type sysfs (rw)
none on /dev/pts type devpts (rw,gid=5,mode=620)
none on /dev/shm type tmpfs (rw)
/dev/dasdb1 on /opt type ext3 (rw)
在​​​​​​​ /etc/fstab 中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​:
# vi /etc/fstab
# cat /etc/fstab
LABEL=/                 /                       ext3    defaults
1 1
none                    /dev/pts                devpts  gid=5,mode=620
0 0
none                    /dev/shm                tmpfs   defaults
0 0
none                    /proc                   proc    defaults
0 0
none                    /sys                    sysfs   defaults
0 0
/dev/dasdb1             /opt                    ext3    defaults
1 2
在​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 中​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ dasd_mod 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​:devnode 對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# vi /etc/modprobe.conf
# cat /etc/modprobe.conf
alias eth0 qeth
options dasd_mod dasd=201,4B2E
回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ mkinitrd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ modprobe.conf 中​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​:
Note that the example below has been modified slightly for readability and for printing purposes. Each line that ends with "(elf64-s390)" should be treated as one line with no spaces, such as /tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/dasd_mod.ko(elf64-s390).
# cd /boot
# mv initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img.old
# mkinitrd -v initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img 2.6.7-1.451.2.3
Looking for deps of module ide-disk
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_eckd_mod         dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_fba_mod  dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module dasd_mod
Looking for deps of module ext3  jbd
Looking for deps of module jbd
Using modules:  ./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_mod.ko
./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_eckd_mod.ko
./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_fba_mod.ko ./kernel/fs/jbd/jbd.ko
./kernel/fs/ext3/ext3.ko
Using loopback device /dev/loop0
/sbin/nash -> /tmp/initrd.AR1182/bin/nash
/sbin/insmod.static -> /tmp/initrd.AR1182/bin/insmod
copy from
/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_mod.ko
(elf64-s390) to 
/tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/dasd_mod.ko(elf64-s390)
copy from
/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_eckd_mod.ko
(elf64-s390) to 
/tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/dasd_eckd_mod.ko
(elf64-s390)
copy from
/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/drivers/s390/block/dasd_fba_mod.ko
(elf64-s390) to 
/tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/dasd_fba_mod.ko
(elf64-s390)
copy from
/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/fs/jbd/jbd.ko(elf64-s390) to 
/tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/jbd.ko(elf64-s390)
copy from
/lib/modules/2.6.7-1.451.2.3/./kernel/fs/ext3/ext3.ko(elf64-s390) to 
/tmp/initrd.AR1182/lib/ext3.ko(elf64-s390)
Loading module dasd_mod with options dasd=201,4B2E
Loading module dasd_eckd_mod
Loading module dasd_fba_mod
Loading module jbd
Loading module ext3
請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ zipl 將​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ initrd,使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# zipl -V
Using config file '/etc/zipl.conf'
Target device information
  Device..........................: 5e:00
  Partition.......................: 5e:01
  Device name.....................: dasda
  DASD device number..............: 0201
  Type............................: disk partition
  Disk layout.....................: ECKD/compatible disk layout
  Geometry - heads................: 15
  Geometry - sectors..............: 12
  Geometry - cylinders............: 3308
  Geometry - start................: 24
  File system block size..........: 4096
  Physical block size.............: 4096
  Device size in physical blocks..: 595416
Building bootmap '/boot//bootmap'
Building menu 'rh-automatic-menu'
Adding #1: IPL section 'linux' (default)
  kernel image......: /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.7-1.451.2.3 at 0x10000
  kernel parmline...: 'root=LABEL=/' at 0x1000
  initial ramdisk...: /boot/initrd-2.6.7-1.451.2.3.img at 0x800000
Preparing boot device: dasda (0201).
Preparing boot menu
  Interactive prompt......: disabled
  Menu timeout............: disabled
  Default configuration...: 'linux'
Syncing disks...
Done.

22.6. 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

新​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​逕​​​​​​​庭​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 2.4 版​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 2.6 版​​​​​​​:
  • proc 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ sys 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /sys/class/net/interface_name/device 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    interface_name 這​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​ eth0 或​​​​​​​ eth2 一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,由​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​授​​​​​​​予​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • /etc/chandev.conf 不​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,sys 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/chandev.conf 中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • /etc/modules.conf 不​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​,現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

22.6.1. 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ qeth 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​ qeth 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# lsmod | grep qeth
qeth                  135240  0
qdio                   45360  2 qeth
ipv6                  303984  13 qeth
ccwgroup               15104  1 qeth
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ lsmod 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ modprobe 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​:
# modprobe qeth
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ qeth 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# echo read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,
data_device_bus_id > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/group
Due to the length of this command, it has been broken into two lines.
再​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,read_device_bus_id 是​​​​​​​ 0.0.0600,write_device_bus_id 是​​​​​​​ 0.0.0601,同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​ data_device_bus_id 是​​​​​​​ 0.0.0602。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ z/VM 虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 192.168.70.69。​​​​​​​
# echo 0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602 > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/group
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ qeth 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# ls /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth
0.0.0600  0.0.09a0  group  notifier_register
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# cat /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/portname
no portname required
這​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:

注意

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# echo portname > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/portname
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
# echo 1 /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/online
並​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​:
# cat /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/online1
A return value of "1" indicates that the device is online, while a return value '0' indicates that the device is offline.
檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​:
# cat /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/if_name
eth1
要​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​ if_name 的​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
# echo new_if_name > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.0600/if_name
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,視​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • add_hhlen
  • broadcast_mode
  • buffer_count
  • canonical_macaddr
  • card_type
  • checksumming
  • chpid
  • detach_state
  • fake_broadcast
  • fake_ll
  • ipa_takeover
  • portno
  • priority_queueing
  • recover
  • route4
  • rxip
  • state
  • ungroup
  • vipa
欲​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ http://www-128.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/october2005_documentation.html#3Device Drivers, Features, and Commands - SC33-8289-02)。​​​​​​​
現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ ifcfg-device,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ device 是​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​早​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ qeth 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,if_name檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​;這​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ eth1。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
# cd /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts
# cp ifcfg-eth0 ifcfg-eth1
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ ifcfg-eth0 例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0
# IBM QETH
DEVICE=eth0
BOOTPROTO=static
HWADDR=00:06:29:FB:5F:F1
IPADDR=9.12.20.136
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=qeth
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1,0.0.09a2
TYPE=Ethernet
編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ifcfg-eth1 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
暫​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ HWADDR 那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ DEVICE 敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ ccwgroup 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ if_name 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ IPADDR 敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​併​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​併​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ ONBOOT 一​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ yes。​​​​​​​
確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ SUBCHANNELS 敘​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​ qeth 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth1
# IBM QETH
DEVICE=eth1
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.70.87
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=qeth
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
TYPE=Ethernet
您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ qeth 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
/etc/modprobe.conf
alias eth0 qeth
alias eth1 qeth
options dasd_mod dasd=0.0.0100,0.0.4b19
現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​:
# ifup eth1
檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​:
# ifconfig eth1
eth1      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 02:00:00:00:00:01
          inet addr:192.168.70.87  Bcast:192.168.70.255  Mask:255.255.255.0
          inet6 addr: fe80::ff:fe00:1/64 Scope:Link
          UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST  MTU:1492  Metric:1
          RX packets:23 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
          TX packets:3 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
          collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
          RX bytes:644 (644.0 b)  TX bytes:264 (264.0 b)
請​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​ ifconfig 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HWaddr 欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ ifcfg-eth1 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
HWADDR=02:00:00:00:00:01
現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ ifcfg-eth1 看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
# IBM QETH
DEVICE=eth1
HWADDR=02:00:00:00:00:01
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.70.69
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=qeth
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
TYPE=Ethernet
檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​:
# route
Kernel IP routing table
Destination     Gateway         Genmask        Flags Metric Ref  Use Iface
192.168.70.0    *               255.255.255.0  U     0      0      0 eth1
9.12.20.0       *               255.255.255.0  U     0      0      0 eth0
169.254.0.0     *               255.255.0.0    U     0      0      0 eth1
default         pdlrouter-if5.p 0.0.0.0        UG    0      0      0 eth0
請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ping 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​觸​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​:
# ping -c 1 192.168.70.8
PING 192.168.70.8 (192.168.70.8) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.70.8: icmp_seq=0 ttl=63 time=8.07 ms
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​併​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/network。​​​​​​​

22.6.2. 加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ IBM System z 系​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
  • 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 將​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
  • 定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 為​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ script。​​​​​​​
  • 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ IBM System z 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

22.6.2.1. 採​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LCS 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​(LCS,LAN channel station)裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ OSA-2 乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​ / 環​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ QDIO 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OSA-Express 高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ QDIO 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ OSA-Express 高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ z990 來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,LCS 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ QDIO 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​億​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​(Gigabit)乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(含​​​​​​​ 1000Base-T)。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,LCS 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​:給​​​​​​​ OSA-Express 高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​億​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ethn;或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​trn,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ n 是​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​n 為​​​​​​​ 0,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,1 為​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​,餘​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
    # modprobe lcs
  • 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
    # echo read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id >
    		/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/group
    Due to the length of this command, it has been broken into two lines.
  • 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    OSA 卡​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​ CHPID 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​達​​​​​​​ 16 組​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ LCS 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​ 0 號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
    # echo portno > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/device_bus_id/portno
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ LCS 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​:
    http://www- 128.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/october2005_documentation.html#3 (IBM System z 與​​​​​​​ S/390 的​​​​​​​ Linux 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)
  • 將​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
    # echo 1 > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/read_device_bus_id/online
  • 定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
    ethn alias lcs
    trn alias lcs
  • 為​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ script。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    ifcfg-ethn
    ifcfg-trn
    這​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
    /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0
    # IBM LCS
    DEVICE=eth0
    BOOTPROTO=static
    HWADDR=00:06:29:FB:5F:F1
    IPADDR=9.12.20.136
    NETMASK=255.255.255.0
    ONBOOT=yes
    NETTYPE=lcs
    SUBCHANNELS=0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1
    PORTNAME=0
    TYPE=Ethernet
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,DEVICE 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:
    DEVICE=ethn
    DEVICE=trn
  • 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ifup 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
    # ifup ethn
    # ifup trn

22.6.2.2. 採​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ QETH 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

QETH 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ IBM System z HiperSockets、​​​​​​​OSA-Express 高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​億​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(含​​​​​​​ 1000Base-T)、​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ QDIO 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ATM 功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​(模​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,QETH 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​:
  • HiperSocket 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ hsin
  • OSA-Express 高​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​億​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ethn。​​​​​​​
  • 環​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ trn。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ n 是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​n 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 0,代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,1 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,餘​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
    # modprobe qeth
  • 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
    # echo read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id >
    /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/group
    Due to the length of this command, it has been broken into two lines.
  • 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ QETH 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​:
    http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/lx26apr04dd01.pdf(IBM System z 與​​​​​​​ S/390 的​​​​​​​ Linux 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)
  • 將​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​:
    # echo 1 > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/read_device_bus_id/online
  • 定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/modprobe.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
    hsin alias qeth
    ethn alias qeth
    trn alias qeth
  • 為​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ script。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    ifcfg-hsin 
    ifcfg-ethn
    ifcfg-trn
    這​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​:
    /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0
    # IBM QETH
    DEVICE=eth0
    BOOTPROTO=static
    HWADDR=00:06:29:FB:5F:F1
    IPADDR=9.12.20.136
    NETMASK=255.255.255.0
    ONBOOT=yes
    NETTYPE=qeth
    SUBCHANNELS=0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1,0.0.09a2
    TYPE=Ethernet
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,DEVICE 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:
    DEVICE=hsin
    DEVICE=ethn
    DEVICE=trn
  • 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    根​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ifup 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
    # ifup hsin
    # ifup ethn
    # ifup trn

22.7. 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 納​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​固​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​率​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​秒​​​​​​​ 100 次​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​;但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​z/VM(R) 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​),就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​負​​​​​​​荷​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​千​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​秒​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​幅​​​​​​​吃​​​​​​​緊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ /proc/檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​達​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
 echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/hz_timer
要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
 echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/hz_timer
預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/sysctl.conf 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​:
 kernel.hz_timer = 0

注意

取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,看​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​誌​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/ 回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​象​​​​​​​;或​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​,回​​​​​​​報​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​廠​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

部 IV. 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network 之​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,與​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 23. 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​講​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

23.1. 決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 4 Update 4 直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​驗​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​訴​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0,蓋​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RHN 確​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
This recommended reinstallation method helps to ensure the best system stability possible.
For more information about re-installing your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system, refer to the Whitepapers available online at http://www.redhat.com/rhel/resource_center/.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Update 4,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
  • 在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • If you have one of Red Hat's layered products (such as the Cluster Suite) installed, it may need to be manually upgraded after the Red Hat Enterprise Linux upgrade has been completed.
  • 在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,協​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​廠​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ .rpmsave 副​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,sendmail.cf.rpmsave)。​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ /root/upgrade.log 紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​月​​​​​​​異​​​​​​​,設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​仔​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​難​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​,升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ swap 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​(少​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ 256MB),建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ swap 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

23.2. 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​ Upgrade Examine 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ /etc/redhat-release 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 時​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​:
linux upgradeany
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux upgradeany 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​舊​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​, 當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 24. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​

24.1. RHN 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ Red Hat 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  • 登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat
  • 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​
  • 連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​,連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​http://www.redhat.com/register/,完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

24.1.1. 登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat 的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​:
https://www.redhat.com/apps/activate/newlogin.html
Red Hat 的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​:
  • 從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Network 獲​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Red Hat 的​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​庫​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat 登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​帳​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
https://rhn.redhat.com/help/forgot_password.pxt

24.1.2. 輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​購​​​​​​​買​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​盒​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​http://www.redhat.com/register/網​​​​​​​頁​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

24.1.3. 連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​

Red Hat Network 註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(Registration Client)會​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​,下​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,幫​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
  1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ — 當​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 發​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,檢​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ — 請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ 主​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​(System Tools),點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ —,在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
    • /usr/bin/rhn_register --register

章 25. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​紹​​​​​​​

注意

本​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ x86 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​念​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
本​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ x86 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​念​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you are reasonably comfortable with disk partitions, you could skip ahead to 節 25.1.4, “建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux”, for more information on the process of freeing up disk space to prepare for a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation. This section also discusses the partition naming scheme used by Linux systems, sharing disk space with other operating systems, and related topics.

25.1. 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​念​​​​​​​

硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​ — 它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​穩​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
When discussing issues such as disk partitioning, it is important to know a bit about the underlying hardware. Unfortunately, it is easy to become bogged down in details. Therefore, this appendix uses a simplified diagram of a disk drive to help explain what is really happening when a disk drive is partitioned. 圖形 25.1, “一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows a brand-new, unused disk drive.
一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.1. 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​甚​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​,是​​​​​​​嗎​​​​​​​?不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​談​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.1. 寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​遠​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​

Experienced computer users probably got this one on the first try. We need to format the drive. Formatting (usually known as "making a file system") writes information to the drive, creating order out of the empty space in an unformatted drive.
有​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.2. 有​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

  • A small percentage of the drive's available space is used to store file system-related data and can be considered as overhead.
  • A file system splits the remaining space into small, consistently-sized segments. For Linux, these segments are known as blocks. [11]
但​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,權​​​​​​​衡​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,付​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​價​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​齒​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
It is also worth noting that there is no single, universal file system. As 圖形 25.3, “有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows, a disk drive may have one of many different file systems written on it. As you might guess, different file systems tend to be incompatible; that is, an operating system that supports one file system (or a handful of related file system types) may not support another. This last statement is not a hard-and-fast rule, however. For example, Red Hat Enterprise Linux supports a wide variety of file systems (including many commonly used by other operating systems), making data interchange between different file systems easy.
有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.3. 有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​ 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 擷​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
有​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.4. 有​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

As 圖形 25.4, “有​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows, some of the previously-empty blocks are now holding data. However, by just looking at this picture, we cannot determine exactly how many files reside on this drive. There may only be one file or many, as all files use at least one block and some files use multiple blocks. Another important point to note is that the used blocks do not have to form a contiguous region; used and unused blocks may be interspersed. This is known as fragmentation. Fragmentation can play a part when attempting to resize an existing partition.
就​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​科​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​觀​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​徹​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.2. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:將​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​,那​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​馬​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​衍​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​翻​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​哲​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​哲​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​凌​​​​​​​亂​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​負​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​(partition table)所​​​​​​​達​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​楚​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.5. 含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

As 圖形 25.5, “含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​” shows, the partition table is divided into four sections or four primary partitions. A primary partition is a partition on a hard drive that can contain only one logical drive (or section). Each section can hold the information necessary to define a single partition, meaning that the partition table can define no more than four partitions.
每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​徵​​​​​​​:
  • 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Whether the partition is "active"
  • The partition's type
Let us take a closer look at each of these characteristics. The starting and ending points actually define the partition's size and location on the disk. The "active" flag is used by some operating systems' boot loaders. In other words, the operating system in the partition that is marked "active" is booted.
The partition's type can be a bit confusing. The type is a number that identifies the partition's anticipated usage. If that statement sounds a bit vague, that is because the meaning of the partition type is a bit vague. Some operating systems use the partition type to denote a specific file system type, to flag the partition as being associated with a particular operating system, to indicate that the partition contains a bootable operating system, or some combination of the three.
含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.6. 含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​佔​​​​​​​據​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​襲​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
We have labeled this partition as being of the "DOS" type. Although it is only one of several possible partition types listed in 表格 25.1, “分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”, it is adequate for the purposes of this discussion.
表格 25.1, “分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”, contains a listing of some popular (and obscure) partition types, along with their hexadecimal numeric values.

表格 25.1. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​

分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​ 數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​ 數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​
空​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 00 Novell Netware 386 65
DOS 12 位​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​ FAT 01 PIC/IX 75
XENIX root 02 Old MINIX 80
XENIX usr 03 Linux/MINUX 81
DOS 16-bit <=32M 04 Linux swap 82
Extended 05 Linux native 83
DOS 16-bit >=32 06 Linux extended 85
OS/2 HPFS 07 Amoeba 93
AIX 08 Amoeba BBT 94
AIX 可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 09 BSD/386 a5
OS/2 Boot Manager 0a OpenBSD a6
Win95 FAT32 0b NEXTSTEP a7
Win95 FAT32 (LBA) 0c BSDI fs b7
Win95 FAT16 (LBA) 0e BSDI swap b8
Win95 Extended (LBA) 0f Syrinx c7
Venix 80286 40 CP/M db
Novell 51 DOS access e1
PPC PReP 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ 41 DOS R/O e3
GNU HURD 63 DOS secondary f2
Novell Netware 286 64 BBT ff

25.1.3. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ - 延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​,時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​久​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​敷​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​長​​​​​​​,越​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Enter the extended partition. As you may have noticed in 表格 25.1, “分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”, there is an "Extended" partition type. It is this partition type that is at the heart of extended partitions.
When a partition is created and its type is set to "Extended," an extended partition table is created. In essence, the extended partition is like a disk drive in its own right — it has a partition table that points to one or more partitions (now called logical partitions, as opposed to the four primary partitions) contained entirely within the extended partition itself. 圖形 25.7, “含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows a disk drive with one primary partition and one extended partition containing two logical partitions (along with some unpartitioned free space).
含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.7. 含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​ — 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,囿​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​Linux存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​顆​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,製​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​

25.1.4. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​臨​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​:
  • 有​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • 正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​
讓​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​楚​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.4.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

圖形 25.8. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​曾​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​歸​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​屬​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
In any case, you can create the necessary partitions from the unused space. Unfortunately, this scenario, although very simple, is not very likely (unless you have just purchased a new disk just for Red Hat Enterprise Linux). Most pre-installed operating systems are configured to take up all available space on a disk drive (refer to 節 25.1.4.3, “使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​”).
下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​平​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.4.2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

In this case, maybe you have one or more partitions that you do not use any longer. Perhaps you have dabbled with another operating system in the past, and the partition(s) you dedicated to it never seem to be used anymore. 圖形 25.9, “含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, illustrates such a situation.
含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.9. 含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.4.3. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​卻​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​難​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,即​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​購​​​​​​​買​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,且​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​:
Destructive Repartitioning
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​幾​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​險​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​『​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​』​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​),然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​買​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
After creating a smaller partition for your existing operating system, you can reinstall any software, restore your data, and start your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation. 圖形 25.10, “毀​​​​​​​滅​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​” shows this being done.
毀​​​​​​​滅​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.10. 毀​​​​​​​滅​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

Non-Destructive Repartitioning
在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​乎​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:該​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​覺​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​穩​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​麻​​​​​​​煩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​呢​​​​​​​?市​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​研​​​​​​​究​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​滅​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​牽​​​​​​​涉​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  • 壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​
  • Resize the existing partition
  • Create new partition(s)
再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
25.1.4.3.1. 壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​
As 圖形 25.11, “已​​​​​​​壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows, the first step is to compress the data in your existing partition. The reason for doing this is to rearrange the data such that it maximizes the available free space at the "end" of the partition.
已​​​​​​​壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.11. 已​​​​​​​壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​真​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​(而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​嚴​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​),您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​迫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​滅​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
25.1.4.3.2. Resize the existing partition
圖形 25.12, “已​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows the actual resizing process. While the actual result of the resizing operation varies depending on the software used, in most cases the newly freed space is used to create an unformatted partition of the same type as the original partition.
已​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.12. 已​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
25.1.4.3.3. Create new partition(s)
As the previous step implied, it may or may not be necessary to create new partitions. However, unless your resizing software is Linux-aware, it is likely that you must delete the partition that was created during the resizing process. 圖形 25.13, “完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​”, shows this being done.
完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

圖形 25.13. 完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​

注意

下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ x86 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ parted 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​費​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ parted 來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​CD-ROM 或​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​),而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ parted,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ parted 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ parted 從​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.5. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​

Linux refers to disk partitions using a combination of letters and numbers which may be confusing, particularly if you are used to the "C drive" way of referring to hard disks and their partitions. In the DOS/Windows world, partitions are named using the following method:
  • Each partition's type is checked to determine if it can be read by DOS/Windows.
  • If the partition's type is compatible, it is assigned a "drive letter." The drive letters start with a "C" and move on to the following letters, depending on the number of partitions to be labeled.
  • 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​彈​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:/dev/xxyN。​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​:
/dev/
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
xx
分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ hd(表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ sd(代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
y
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/dev/hda (第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​ /dev/sdb(第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
N
最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​(主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 1 到​​​​​​​ 4 表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 5 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/dev/hda3 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​伸​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ /dev/sdb6 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​規​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​ DOS/微​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 所​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​專​​​​​​​門​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​謹​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.6. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ Linux 與​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.7. 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​

One area that many people new to Linux find confusing is the matter of how partitions are used and accessed by the Linux operating system. In DOS/Windows, it is relatively simple: Each partition gets a "drive letter." You then use the correct drive letter to refer to files and directories on its corresponding partition.
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ Linux 在​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​,已​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​(稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ 掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​)中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ /dev/hda5 被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /usr/,這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /usr/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/hda5 中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ /usr/share/doc/FAQ/txt/Linux-FAQ 將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/hda5 上​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​ /etc/X11/gdm/Sessions/Gnome 則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /usr/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​屬​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ /dev/hda7)也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /usr/local/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ /usr/local/man/whatis 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/hda7 上​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/hda5 上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

25.1.8. 多​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​?

At this point in the process of preparing to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you must give some consideration to the number and size of the partitions to be used by your new operating system. The question of "how many partitions" continues to spark debate within the Linux community and, without any end to the debate in sight, it is safe to say that there are probably as many partition layouts as there are people debating the issue.
請​​​​​​​牢​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:swap、​​​​​​​/boot/(或​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​/boot/efi/分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​Itanium 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /var/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ /(root)。​​​​​​​


[11] Blocks really are consistently sized, unlike our illustrations. Keep in mind, also, that an average disk drive contains thousands of blocks. But for the purposes of this discussion, please ignore these minor discrepancies.

部 V. 基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​緊​​​​​​​急​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 26. 基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​

當​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,總​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​辦​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​緊​​​​​​​急​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.1. 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:
  • 您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux(執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 3 或​​​​​​​ 5)。​​​​​​​
  • You are having hardware or software problems, and you want to get a few important files off of your system's hard drive.
  • 您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.1.1. 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ GRUB 或​​​​​​​ LILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(MBR),如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ / 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf。​​​​​​​

26.1.2. 硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​/軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​廣​​​​​​​泛​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.1.3. Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​忘​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​?如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ passwd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.2. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

Rescue mode provides the ability to boot a small Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment entirely from CD-ROM, or some other boot method, instead of the system's hard drive.
As the name implies, rescue mode is provided to rescue you from something. During normal operation, your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system uses files located on your system's hard drive to do everything — run programs, store your files, and more.
However, there may be times when you are unable to get Red Hat Enterprise Linux running completely enough to access files on your system's hard drive. Using rescue mode, you can access the files stored on your system's hard drive, even if you cannot actually run Red Hat Enterprise Linux from that hard drive.
從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​[12]
  • 從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​)碟​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​ rescue 當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​,舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
linux rescue
您​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​NFS 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ RPM 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​:
The rescue environment will now attempt to find your Linux installation and mount it under the directory /mnt/sysimage. You can then make any changes required to your system. If you want to proceed with this step choose 'Continue'. You can also choose to mount your file systems read-only instead of read-write by choosing 'Read-only'. If for some reason this process fails you can choose 'Skip' and this step will be skipped and you will go directly to a command shell.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /mnt/sysimage/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 唯​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /mnt/sysimage/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 1 與​​​​​​​ 2 會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Ctrl-Alt-F1 按​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 1,而​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Ctrl-Alt-F2 來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 2):
sh-3.00b#
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
即​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​暫​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 3 或​​​​​​​ 5)檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
chroot /mnt/sysimage
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ rpm 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​(需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ chroot 的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ exit,您​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 略​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ LVM2 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /foo 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
mount -t ext3 /dev/mapper/VolGroup00-LogVol02 /foo
在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,/foo 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​剛​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ /dev/mapper/VolGroup00-LogVol02 為​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LVM 邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ ext2,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ ext2 取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ ext3。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​:
fdisk -l
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​ LVM 實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​:
pvdisplay
vgdisplay
lvdisplay
在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​:
  • ssh,scp 與​​​​​​​ ping:測​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
  • dump 與​​​​​​​ restore:適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​帶​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​
  • parted 與​​​​​​​ fdisk:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​
  • rpm:用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​
  • joe 來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​歡​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ emacs、​​​​​​​pico 或​​​​​​​ vi,將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ joe 編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.2.1. 重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,GRUB 會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​破​​​​​​​壞​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ GRUB 重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​:
  • 從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux rescue 以​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ chroot /mnt/sysimage 以​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​ /dev/hda 為​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /sbin/grub-install /dev/hda 重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GRUM 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • /boot/grub/grub.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,瀏​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​ GRUB 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.3. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​卻​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​卻​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 1,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell。​​​​​​​ 單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 1 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
  1. 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ a 來​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 在​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​ single(按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​ 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ single),再​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter 以​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

26.4. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​緊​​​​​​​急​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​緊​​​​​​​急​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​盡​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,緊​​​​​​​急​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​優​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ init 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ init 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[12] 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 27. POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To boot in rescue mode on IBM System i with power control NWSD , follow the instructions for booting the installation program, with this change: In the NWSD, set the IPL parameters field to 'rescue' (including the quotes), or to 'dd rescue' if you need to load the SCSI driver. On other systems, specify the rescue or dd rescue (without quotes) after the default kernel name at the YABOOT prompt.
After the Language Selection screen (節 12.13, “選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​”), the installation program attempts to mount the disk partitions on your system. It then presents you with a shell prompt where you can make the changes you need. These changes may include storing the kernel and command line into the IPL source, as described in the Installation Complete section (節 12.26, “安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​”).
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ exit 0 來​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ shell。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​ C 那​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ A 或​​​​​​​ B 或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ *NWSSTG 來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​(vary off)系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​離​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​ shell。​​​​​​​

27.1. 從​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ SCSI 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DASD 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ SCSI 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​:
  1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux rescue askmethod 從​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ NFS 當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 請​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 使​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​副​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS 或​​​​​​​ FTP 被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ IPL 參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ IPL 的​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IFS(以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​)上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot.img 副​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  5. Make sure the installation disc is not in your CD-ROM drive.
  6. IPL Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  7. Follow the prompts as decribed in 章 27, POWER 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​. An additonal prompt for the installation source appears. Select NFS or FTP (as appropriate) and complete the following network configuration screen.
  8. 當​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ SCSI 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

部 VI. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide 討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​厚​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​礙​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ kickstart(自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​術​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide 得​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

章 28. Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

28.1. 到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​麼​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​?

許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​,Red hat 開​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ kickstart,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​達​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​半​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​率​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Kickstart 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.2. 該​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​?

Kickstart 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS, FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​:
  1. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​虜​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.3. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ Kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​

Kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​純​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Kickstart 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​暫​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /root/anaconda-ks.cfg 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ ASCII 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
  • 必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​(除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​),主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 省​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​(除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​又​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 以​​​​​​​井​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​,且​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 至​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ kickstart 的​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​:
    • 語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​
    • 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​
    • 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​)
    • 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​
    • upgrade 關​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​
    • 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

28.4. Kickstart 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​

The following options can be placed in a kickstart file. If you prefer to use a graphical interface for creating your kickstart file, use the Kickstart Configurator application. Refer to 章 29, Kickstart Configurator for details.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​(=),必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,括​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​([])中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
autopart(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Automatically create partitions — 1 GB or more root (/) partition, a swap partition, and an appropriate boot partition for the architecture. One or more of the default partition sizes can be redefined with the part directive.
ignoredisk(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Causes the installer to ignore the specified disks. This is useful if you use autopartition and want to be sure that some disks are ignored. For example, without ignoredisk, attempting to deploy on a SAN-cluster the kickstart would fail, as the installer detects passive paths to the SAN that return no partition table.
ignoredisk 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:
ignoredisk --drives=drive1,drive2,...
driveN 為​​​​​​​ sda, sdb,..., hda,... 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
autostep(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Similar to interactive except it goes to the next screen for you. It is used mostly for debugging.
  • --autoscreenshot — Take a screenshot at every step during installation and copy the images over to /root/anaconda-screenshots after installation is complete. This is most useful for documentation.
auth or authconfig(必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Sets up the authentication options for the system. It is similar to the authconfig command, which can be run after the install. By default, passwords are normally encrypted and are not shadowed.
  • --enablemd5 — Use md5 encryption for user passwords.
  • --enablenis — Turns on NIS support. By default, --enablenis uses whatever domain it finds on the network. A domain should almost always be set by hand with the --nisdomain= option.
  • --nisdomain= — NIS domain name to use for NIS services.
  • --nisserver= — Server to use for NIS services (broadcasts by default).
  • --useshadow or --enableshadow — Use shadow passwords.
  • --enableldap — Turns on LDAP support in /etc/nsswitch.conf, allowing your system to retrieve information about users (UIDs, home directories, shells, etc.) from an LDAP directory. To use this option, you must install the nss_ldap package. You must also specify a server and a base DN (distinguished name) with --ldapserver= and --ldapbasedn=.
  • --enableldapauth — Use LDAP as an authentication method. This enables the pam_ldap module for authentication and changing passwords, using an LDAP directory. To use this option, you must have the nss_ldap package installed. You must also specify a server and a base DN with --ldapserver= and --ldapbasedn=.
  • --ldapserver= — If you specified either --enableldap or --enableldapauth, use this option to specify the name of the LDAP server to use. This option is set in the /etc/ldap.conf file.
  • --ldapbasedn= — If you specified either --enableldap or --enableldapauth, use this option to specify the DN in your LDAP directory tree under which user information is stored. This option is set in the /etc/ldap.conf file.
  • --enableldaptls — Use TLS (Transport Layer Security) lookups. This option allows LDAP to send encrypted usernames and passwords to an LDAP server before authentication.
  • --enablekrb5 — Use Kerberos 5 for authenticating users. Kerberos itself does not know about home directories, UIDs, or shells. If you enable Kerberos, you must make users' accounts known to this workstation by enabling LDAP, NIS, or Hesiod or by using the /usr/sbin/useradd command. If you use this option, you must have the pam_krb5 package installed.
  • --krb5realm= — The Kerberos 5 realm to which your workstation belongs.
  • --krb5kdc= — The KDC (or KDCs) that serve requests for the realm. If you have multiple KDCs in your realm, separate their names with commas (,).
  • --krb5adminserver= — The KDC in your realm that is also running kadmind. This server handles password changing and other administrative requests. This server must be run on the master KDC if you have more than one KDC.
  • --enablehesiod — Enable Hesiod support for looking up user home directories, UIDs, and shells. More information on setting up and using Hesiod on your network is in /usr/share/doc/glibc-2.x.x/README.hesiod, which is included in the glibc package. Hesiod is an extension of DNS that uses DNS records to store information about users, groups, and various other items.
  • --hesiodlhs — The Hesiod LHS ("left-hand side") option, set in /etc/hesiod.conf. This option is used by the Hesiod library to determine the name to search DNS for when looking up information, similar to LDAP's use of a base DN.
  • --hesiodrhs — The Hesiod RHS ("right-hand side") option, set in /etc/hesiod.conf. This option is used by the Hesiod library to determine the name to search DNS for when looking up information, similar to LDAP's use of a base DN.

    注意

    To look up user information for "jim", the Hesiod library looks up jim.passwd<LHS><RHS>, which should resolve to a TXT record that looks like what his passwd entry would look like (jim:*:501:501:Jungle Jim:/home/jim:/bin/bash). For groups, the situation is identical, except jim.group<LHS><RHS> would be used.
    Looking up users and groups by number is handled by making "501.uid" a CNAME for "jim.passwd", and "501.gid" a CNAME for "jim.group". Note that the library does not place a period . in front of the LHS and RHS values when performing a search. Therefore the LHS and RHS values need to have a period placed in front of them in order if they require this.
  • --enablesmbauth — Enables authentication of users against an SMB server (typically a Samba or Windows server). SMB authentication support does not know about home directories, UIDs, or shells. If you enable SMB, you must make users' accounts known to the workstation by enabling LDAP, NIS, or Hesiod or by using the /usr/sbin/useradd command to make their accounts known to the workstation. To use this option, you must have the pam_smb package installed.
  • --smbservers= — The name of the server(s) to use for SMB authentication. To specify more than one server, separate the names with commas (,).
  • --smbworkgroup= — The name of the workgroup for the SMB servers.
  • --enablecache — Enables the nscd service. The nscd service caches information about users, groups, and various other types of information. Caching is especially helpful if you choose to distribute information about users and groups over your network using NIS, LDAP, or hesiod.
bootloader(必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Specifies how the boot loader should be installed. This option is required for both installations and upgrades.
  • --append= — Specifies kernel parameters. To specify multiple parameters, separate them with spaces. For example:
    bootloader --location=mbr --append="hdd=ide-scsi ide=nodma"
  • --driveorder — Specify which drive is first in the BIOS boot order. For example:
    bootloader --driveorder=sda,hda
  • --location= — Specifies where the boot record is written. Valid values are the following: mbr (the default), partition (installs the boot loader on the first sector of the partition containing the kernel), or none (do not install the boot loader).
  • --password= — If using GRUB, sets the GRUB boot loader password to the one specified with this option. This should be used to restrict access to the GRUB shell, where arbitrary kernel options can be passed.
  • --md5pass= — If using GRUB, similar to --password= except the password should already be encrypted.
  • --upgrade — Upgrade the existing boot loader configuration, preserving the old entries. This option is only available for upgrades.
clearpart(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Removes partitions from the system, prior to creation of new partitions. By default, no partitions are removed.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ clearpart 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,--onpart 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • --all — Erases all partitions from the system.
  • --drives= — Specifies which drives to clear partitions from. For example, the following clears all the partitions on the first two drives on the primary IDE controller:
    clearpart --drives=hda,hdb --all
  • --initlabel — Initializes the disk label to the default for your architecture (for example msdos for x86 and gpt for Itanium). It is useful so that the installation program does not ask if it should initialize the disk label if installing to a brand new hard drive.
  • --linux — Erases all Linux partitions.
  • --none (default) — Do not remove any partitions.
cmdline(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Perform the installation in a completely non-interactive command line mode. Any prompts for interaction halts the install. This mode is useful on IBM System z systems with the x3270 console.
device(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
On most PCI systems, the installation program autoprobes for Ethernet and SCSI cards properly. On older systems and some PCI systems, however, kickstart needs a hint to find the proper devices. The device command, which tells the installation program to install extra modules, is in this format:
device <type> <moduleName> --opts=<options>
  • <type> — Replace with either scsi or eth.
  • <moduleName> — Replace with the name of the kernel module which should be installed.
  • --opts= — Mount options to use for mounting the NFS export. Any options that can be specified in /etc/fstab for an NFS mount are allowed. The options are listed in the nfs(5) man page. Multiple options are separated with a comma.
driverdisk(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Driver diskettes can be used during kickstart installations. You must copy the driver diskettes's contents to the root directory of a partition on the system's hard drive. Then you must use the driverdisk command to tell the installation program where to look for the driver disk.
driverdisk <partition> [--type=<fstype>]
另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
driverdisk --source=ftp://path/to/dd.img
driverdisk --source=http://path/to/dd.img
driverdisk --source=nfs:host:/path/to/img
  • <partition> — Partition containing the driver disk.
  • --type= — File system type (for example, vfat or ext2).
firewall(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
This option corresponds to the Firewall Configuration screen in the installation program:
firewall --enabled|--disabled [--trust=] <device> [--port=]
  • --enabled or --enable — Reject incoming connections that are not in response to outbound requests, such as DNS replies or DHCP requests. If access to services running on this machine is needed, you can choose to allow specific services through the firewall.
  • --disabled or --disable — Do not configure any iptables rules.
  • --trust= — Listing a device here, such as eth0, allows all traffic coming from that device to go through the firewall. To list more than one device, use --trust eth0 --trust eth1. Do NOT use a comma-separated format such as --trust eth0, eth1.
  • <incoming> — Replace with one or more of the following to allow the specified services through the firewall.
    • --ssh
    • --telnet
    • --smtp
    • --http
    • --ftp
  • --port= — You can specify that ports be allowed through the firewall using the port:protocol format. For example, to allow IMAP access through your firewall, specify imap:tcp. Numeric ports can also be specified explicitly; for example, to allow UDP packets on port 1234 through, specify 1234:udp. To specify multiple ports, separate them by commas.
firstboot(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Determine whether the Setup Agent starts the first time the system is booted. If enabled, the firstboot package must be installed. If not specified, this option is disabled by default.
  • --enable or --enabled — The Setup Agent is started the first time the system boots.
  • --disable or --disabled — The Setup Agent is not started the first time the system boots.
  • --reconfig — Enable the Setup Agent to start at boot time in reconfiguration mode. This mode enables the language, mouse, keyboard, root password, security level, time zone, and networking configuration options in addition to the default ones.
halt(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Halt the system after the installation has successfully completed. This is similar to a manual installation, where anaconda displays a message and waits for the user to press a key before rebooting. During a kickstart installation, if no completion method is specified, the reboot option is used as default.
halt 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ shutdown -h 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ poweroff、​​​​​​​reboot 與​​​​​​​ shutdown kickstart 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
graphical(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Perform the kickstart installation in graphical mode. This is the default.
install(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Tells the system to install a fresh system rather than upgrade an existing system. This is the default mode. For installation, you must specify the type of installation from cdrom, harddrive, nfs, or url (for FTP or HTTP installations). The install command and the installation method command must be on separate lines.
  • cdrom — Install from the first CD-ROM drive on the system.
  • harddrive — Install from a Red Hat installation tree on a local drive, which must be either vfat or ext2.
    • --biospart=
      從​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ 82)上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ BIOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • --partition=
      從​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ sdb2)上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ BIOS 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • --dir=
      包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​ variant 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​:
    harddrive --partition=hdb2 --dir=/tmp/install-tree
  • nfs — Install from the NFS server specified.
    • --server=
      安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​(主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
    • --dir=
      包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​ variant 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • --opts=
      使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ NFS 輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
    舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​:
    nfs --server=nfsserver.example.com --dir=/tmp/install-tree
  • url — Install from an installation tree on a remote server via FTP or HTTP.
    舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​:
    url --url http://<server>/<dir>
    or:
    url --url ftp://<username>:<password>@<server>/<dir>
interactive(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Uses the information provided in the kickstart file during the installation, but allow for inspection and modification of the values given. You are presented with each screen of the installation program with the values from the kickstart file. Either accept the values by clicking Next or change the values and click Next to continue. Refer to the autostep command.
iscsi(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
issci --ipaddr= [options].
  • --target
  • --port=
  • --user=
  • --password=
key(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Specify an installation key, which is needed to aid in package selection and identify your system for support purposes. This command is Red Hat Enterprise Linux-specific; it has no meaning for Fedora and will be ignored.
  • --skip — Skip entering a key. Usually if the key command is not given, anaconda will pause at this step to prompt for a key. This option allows automated installation to continue if you do not have a key or do not want to provide one.
keyboard(必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Sets system keyboard type. Here is the list of available keyboards on i386, Itanium, and Alpha machines:
be-latin1, bg, br-abnt2, cf, cz-lat2, cz-us-qwertz, de, de-latin1, 
de-latin1-nodeadkeys, dk, dk-latin1, dvorak, es, et, fi, fi-latin1, 
fr, fr-latin0, fr-latin1, fr-pc, fr_CH, fr_CH-latin1, gr, hu, hu101, 
is-latin1, it, it-ibm, it2, jp106, la-latin1, mk-utf, no, no-latin1, 
pl, pt-latin1, ro_win, ru, ru-cp1251, ru-ms, ru1, ru2,  ru_win, 
se-latin1, sg, sg-latin1, sk-qwerty, slovene, speakup,  speakup-lt, 
sv-latin1, sg, sg-latin1, sk-querty, slovene, trq, ua,  uk, us, us-acentos
/usr/lib/python2.2/site-packages/rhpl/keyboard_models.py 中​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ rhpl 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
lang (required)
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​英​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​,kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​:
lang en_US
/usr/share/system-config-language/locale-list 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ system-config-language 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​(基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​韓​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​英​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
langsupport (deprecated)
不​​​​​​​贊​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ %packages。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ %packages
@french-support
logvol (optional)
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​(LVM)的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​:
logvol <mntpoint> --vgname=<name> --size=<size> --name=<name> <options>
選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
  • --noformat — Use an existing logical volume and do not format it.
  • --useexisting — Use an existing logical volume and reformat it.
  • --fstype= — Sets the file system type for the logical volume. Valid values are ext2, ext3, swap, and vfat.
  • --fsoptions= — Specifies a free form string of options to be used when mounting the filesystem. This string will be copied into the /etc/fstab file of the installed system and should be enclosed in quotes.
  • --bytes-per-inode= — Specifies the size of inodes on the filesystem to be made on the logical volume. Not all filesystems support this option, so it is silently ignored for those cases.
  • --grow= — Tells the logical volume to grow to fill available space (if any), or up to the maximum size setting.
  • --maxsize= — The maximum size in megabytes when the logical volume is set to grow. Specify an integer value here, and do not append the number with MB.
  • --recommended= — Determine the size of the logical volume automatically.
  • --percent= — Specify the size of the logical volume as a percentage of available space in the volume group.
先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
part pv.01 --size 3000 
volgroup myvg pv.01
logvol / --vgname=myvg --size=2000 --name=rootvol
logging (optional)
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​ anaconda 登​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • --host= — Send logging information to the given remote host, which must be running a syslogd process configured to accept remote logging.
  • --port= — If the remote syslogd process uses a port other than the default, it may be specified with this option.
  • --level= — One of debug, info, warning, error, or critical.
    指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ tty3 所​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck (optional)
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​ anaconda 在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ mediacheck。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
monitor (optional)
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ monitor 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,anaconda 會​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X 來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • --hsync= — Specifies the horizontal sync frequency of the monitor.
  • --monitor= — Use specified monitor; monitor name should be from the list of monitors in /usr/share/hwdata/MonitorsDB from the hwdata package. The list of monitors can also be found on the X Configuration screen of the Kickstart Configurator. This is ignored if --hsync or --vsync is provided. If no monitor information is provided, the installation program tries to probe for it automatically.
  • --noprobe= — Do not try to probe the monitor.
  • --vsync= — Specifies the vertical sync frequency of the monitor.
mouse (deprecated)
The mouse keyword is deprecated.
network (optional)
為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​(也​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​HTTP 或​​​​​​​ FTP 來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​),則​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​假​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ eth0 經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​(BOOTP/DHCP) 所​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ network 的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • --bootproto= — One of dhcp, bootp, or static.
    預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ dhcpbootp 與​​​​​​​ dhcp 視​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    DHCP 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​猜​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​,BOOTP 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ BOOTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP:
    network --bootproto=dhcp
    如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ BOOTP 來​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​:
    network --bootproto=bootp
    The static method requires that you enter all the required networking information in the kickstart file. As the name implies, this information is static and are used during and after the installation. The line for static networking is more complex, as you must include all network configuration information on one line. You must specify the IP address, netmask, gateway, and nameserver. For example: (the "\" indicates that this should be read as one continuous line):
    network --bootproto=static --ip=10.0.2.15 --netmask=255.255.255.0 \
    --gateway=10.0.2.254 --nameserver=10.0.2.1
    
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​靜​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​:
    • 所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​靜​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​斜​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • You can also configure multiple nameservers here. To do so, specify them as a comma-delimited list in the command line. For example:
      network --bootproto=static --ip=10.0.2.15 --netmask=255.255.255.0 \
      --gateway=10.0.2.254 --nameserver 192.168.2.1,192.168.3.1
      
  • --device= — Used to select a specific Ethernet device for installation. Note that using --device= is not effective unless the kickstart file is a local file (such as ks=floppy), since the installation program configures the network to find the kickstart file. For example:
    network --bootproto=dhcp --device=eth0
  • --ip= — IP address for the machine to be installed.
  • --gateway= — Default gateway as an IP address.
  • --nameserver= — Primary nameserver, as an IP address.
  • --nodns — Do not configure any DNS server.
  • --netmask= — Netmask for the installed system.
  • --hostname= — Hostname for the installed system.
  • --ethtool= — Specifies additional low-level settings for the network device which will be passed to the ethtool program.
  • --essid= — The network ID for wireless networks.
  • --wepkey= — The encryption key for wireless networks.
  • --onboot= — Whether or not to enable the device at boot time.
  • --class= — The DHCP class.
  • --mtu= — The MTU of the device.
  • --noipv4 — Disable IPv4 on this device.
  • --noipv6 — Disable IPv6 on this device.
multipath (optional)
multipath --name= --device= --rule=
part or partition (required for installs, ignored for upgrades)
為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​

警告

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ --noformat 與​​​​​​​ --onpart,否​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • <mntpoint> — The <mntpoint> is where the partition is mounted and must be of one of the following forms:
    • /<path>
      例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /、​​​​​​​/usr、​​​​​​​/home
    • swap
      這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​ swap 空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
      如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ --recommended 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
      swap --recommended
      自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​產​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ sawp 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • raid.<id>
      軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ raid
    • pv.<id>
      LVM 所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ logvol)。​​​​​​​
  • --size= — The minimum partition size in megabytes. Specify an integer value here such as 500. Do not append the number with MB.
  • --grow — Tells the partition to grow to fill available space (if any), or up to the maximum size setting.
  • --maxsize= — The maximum partition size in megabytes when the partition is set to grow. Specify an integer value here, and do not append the number with MB.
  • --noformat — Tells the installation program not to format the partition, for use with the --onpart command.
  • --onpart= or --usepart= — Put the partition on the already existing device. For example:
    partition /home --onpart=hda1
    將​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /home 放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /dev/hda1。​​​​​​​
  • --ondisk= or --ondrive= — Forces the partition to be created on a particular disk. For example, --ondisk=sdb puts the partition on the second SCSI disk on the system.
  • --asprimary — Forces automatic allocation of the partition as a primary partition, or the partitioning fails.
  • --type= (replaced by fstype) — This option is no longer available. Use fstype.
  • --fstype= — Sets the file system type for the partition. Valid values are ext2, ext3, swap, and vfat.
  • --start= — Specifies the starting cylinder for the partition. It requires that a drive be specified with --ondisk= or ondrive=. It also requires that the ending cylinder be specified with --end= or the partition size be specified with --size=.
  • --end= — Specifies the ending cylinder for the partition. It requires that the starting cylinder be specified with --start=.
  • --bytes-per-inode= — Specifies the size of inodes on the filesystem to be made on the partition. Not all filesystems support this option, so it is silently ignored for those cases.
  • --recommended — Determine the size of the partition automatically.
  • --onbiosdisk — Forces the partition to be created on a particular disk as discovered by the BIOS.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​敗​​​​​​​,診​​​​​​​斷​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 3 上​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
poweroff (optional)
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,anaconda 會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​ reboot 則​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
poweroff 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ shutdown -p 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​雷​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

The poweroff option is highly dependent on the system hardware in use. Specifically, certain hardware components such as the BIOS, APM (advanced power management), and ACPI (advanced configuration and power interface) must be able to interact with the system kernel. Contact your manufacturer for more information on you system's APM/ACPI abilities.
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ kickstart 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ halt、​​​​​​​reboot 與​​​​​​​ shutdown
raid (optional)
組​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
raid <mntpoint> --level=<level> --device=<mddevice> <partitions*>
  • <mntpoint> — Location where the RAID file system is mounted. If it is /, the RAID level must be 1 unless a boot partition (/boot) is present. If a boot partition is present, the /boot partition must be level 1 and the root (/) partition can be any of the available types. The <partitions*> (which denotes that multiple partitions can be listed) lists the RAID identifiers to add to the RAID array.
  • --level= — RAID level to use (0, 1, or 5).
  • --device= — Name of the RAID device to use (such as md0 or md1). RAID devices range from md0 to md15, and each may only be used once.
  • --bytes-per-inode= — Specifies the size of inodes on the filesystem to be made on the RAID device. Not all filesystems support this option, so it is silently ignored for those cases.
  • --spares= — Specifies the number of spare drives allocated for the RAID array. Spare drives are used to rebuild the array in case of drive failure.
  • --fstype= — Sets the file system type for the RAID array. Valid values are ext2, ext3, swap, and vfat.
  • --fsoptions= — Specifies a free form string of options to be used when mounting the filesystem. This string will be copied into the /etc/fstab file of the installed system and should be enclosed in quotes.
  • --noformat — Use an existing RAID device and do not format the RAID array.
  • --useexisting — Use an existing RAID device and reformat it.
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID level 1 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ /,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID level 5 給​​​​​​​ /usr,在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​假​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ SCSI 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
part raid.01 --size=60 --ondisk=sda
part raid.02 --size=60 --ondisk=sdb 
part raid.03 --size=60 --ondisk=sdc
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sda  
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sdb  
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sdc
part raid.11 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sda  
part raid.12 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sdb  
part raid.13 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sdc
raid / --level=1 --device=md0 raid.01 raid.02 raid.03  
raid /usr --level=5 --device=md1 raid.11 raid.12 raid.13
reboot (optional)
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​(無​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​ kickstart 會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
reboot 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ shutdown -r 雷​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

依​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ reboot 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​ 會​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,reboot 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ kickstart 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ halt、​​​​​​​poweroff 與​​​​​​​ shutdown。​​​​​​​
repo (optional)
設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​額​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ yum 儲​​​​​​​藏​​​​​​​室​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​ repo 路​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
repo --name=<repoid> [--baseurl=<url>| --mirrorlist=<url>]
  • --name= — The repo id. This option is required.
  • --baseurl= — The URL for the repository. The variables that may be used in yum repo config files are not supported here. You may use one of either this option or --mirrorlist, not both.
  • --mirrorlist= — The URL pointing at a list of mirrors for the repository. The variables that may be used in yum repo config files are not supported here. You may use one of either this option or --baseurl, not both.
rootpw(必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Sets the system's root password to the <password> argument.
rootpw [--iscrypted] <password>
  • --iscrypted — If this is present, the password argument is assumed to already be encrypted.
selinux(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Sets the state of SELinux on the installed system. SELinux defaults to enforcing in anaconda.
selinux [--disabled|--enforcing|--permissive]
  • --enforcing — Enables SELinux with the default targeted policy being enforced.

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ selinux 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​,表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ SELinux 已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ --enforcing。​​​​​​​
  • --permissive — Outputs warnings based on the SELinux policy, but does not actually enforce the policy.
  • --disabled — Disables SELinux completely on the system.
相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide。​​​​​​​
services(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Modifies the default set of services that will run under the default runlevel. The services listed in the disabled list will be disabled before the services listed in the enabled list are enabled.
  • --disabled — Disable the services given in the comma separated list.
  • --enabled — Enable the services given in the comma separated list.
shutdown(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Shut down the system after the installation has successfully completed. During a kickstart installation, if no completion method is specified, the reboot option is used as default.
shutdown 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ shutdown 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​雷​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ kickstart 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​ halt、​​​​​​​poweroff 與​​​​​​​ reboot
skipx(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
If present, X is not configured on the installed system.
text(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Perform the kickstart installation in text mode. Kickstart installations are performed in graphical mode by default.
timezone(必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Sets the system time zone to <timezone> which may be any of the time zones listed by timeconfig.
timezone [--utc] <timezone>
  • --utc — If present, the system assumes the hardware clock is set to UTC (Greenwich Mean) time.
upgrade(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Tells the system to upgrade an existing system rather than install a fresh system. You must specify one of cdrom, harddrive, nfs, or url (for FTP and HTTP) as the location of the installation tree. Refer to install for details.
user(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Creates a new user on the system.
user --name=<username> [--groups=<list>] [--homedir=<homedir>] [--password=<password>] [--iscrypted] [--shell=<shell>] [--uid=<uid>]
  • --name= — Provides the name of the user. This option is required.
  • --groups= — In addition to the default group, a comma separated list of group names the user should belong to.
  • --homedir= — The home directory for the user. If not provided, this defaults to /home/<username>.
  • --password= — The new user's password. If not provided, the account will be locked by default.
  • --iscrypted= — Is the password provided by --password already encrypted or not?
  • --shell= — The user's login shell. If not provided, this defaults to the system default.
  • --uid= — The user's UID. If not provided, this defaults to the next available non-system UID.
vnc(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Allows the graphical installation to be viewed remotely via VNC. This method is usually preferred over text mode, as there are some size and language limitations in text installs. With no options, this command will start a VNC server on the machine with no password and will print out the command that needs to be run to connect a remote machine.
vnc [--host=<hostname>] [--port=<port>] [--password=<password>]
  • --host= — Instead of starting a VNC server on the install machine, connect to the VNC viewer process listening on the given hostname.
  • --port= — Provide a port that the remote VNC viewer process is listening on. If not provided, anaconda will use the VNC default.
  • --password= — Set a password which must be provided to connect to the VNC session. This is optional, but recommended.
volgroup(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Use to create a Logical Volume Management (LVM) group with the syntax:
volgroup <name> <partition> <options>
選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
  • --noformat — Use an existing volume group and do not format it.
  • --useexisting — Use an existing volume group and reformat it.
  • --pesize= — Set the size of the physical extents.
先​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
part pv.01 --size 3000 
volgroup myvg pv.01 
logvol / --vgname=myvg --size=2000 --name=rootvol
xconfig(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Configures the X Window System. If this option is not given, the user must configure X manually during the installation, if X was installed; this option should not be used if X is not installed on the final system.
  • --driver — Specify the X driver to use for the video hardware.
  • --videoram= — Specifies the amount of video RAM the video card has.
  • --defaultdesktop= — Specify either GNOME or KDE to set the default desktop (assumes that GNOME Desktop Environment and/or KDE Desktop Environment has been installed through %packages).
  • --startxonboot — Use a graphical login on the installed system.
  • --resolution= — Specify the default resolution for the X Window System on the installed system. Valid values are 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768, 1152x864, 1280x1024, 1400x1050, 1600x1200. Be sure to specify a resolution that is compatible with the video card and monitor.
  • --depth= — Specify the default color depth for the X Window System on the installed system. Valid values are 8, 16, 24, and 32. Be sure to specify a color depth that is compatible with the video card and monitor.
zerombr(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
If zerombr is specified any invalid partition tables found on disks are initialized. This destroys all of the contents of disks with invalid partition tables.
Note that in previous versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, this command was specified as zerombr yes. This form is now deprecated; you should now simply specify zerombr in your kickstart file instead.
zfcp(非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)
Define a Fiber channel device (IBM System z).
zfcp [--devnum=<devnum>] [--fcplun=<fcplun>] [--scsiid=<scsiid>] [--scsilun=<scsilun>] [--wwpn=<wwpn>]
%include (optional)
Use the %include /path/to/file command to include the contents of another file in the kickstart file as though the contents were at the location of the %include command in the kickstart file.

28.4.1. 進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​

下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​ kickstart 的​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​,合​​​​​​​併​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​ clearpart、​​​​​​​raid、​​​​​​​part、​​​​​​​volgroup 與​​​​​​​ logvol。​​​​​​​
clearpart --drives=hda,hdc --initlabel  
# Raid 1 IDE config 
part raid.11    --size 1000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hda 
part raid.12    --size 1000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hda 
part raid.13    --size 2000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hda 
part raid.14    --size 8000                     --ondrive=hda 
part raid.15    --size 1 --grow                 --ondrive=hda             
part raid.21    --size 1000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hdc 
part raid.22    --size 1000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hdc 
part raid.23    --size 2000     --asprimary     --ondrive=hdc 
part raid.24    --size 8000                     --ondrive=hdc 
part raid.25    --size 1 --grow                 --ondrive=hdc  

# You can add --spares=x  
raid /          --fstype ext3 --device md0 --level=RAID1 raid.11 raid.21 
raid /safe      --fstype ext3 --device md1 --level=RAID1 raid.12 raid.22 
raid swap       --fstype swap --device md2 --level=RAID1 raid.13 raid.23 
raid /usr       --fstype ext3 --device md3 --level=RAID1 raid.14 raid.24 
raid pv.01      --fstype ext3 --device md4 --level=RAID1 raid.15 raid.25  

# LVM configuration so that we can resize /var and /usr/local later 
volgroup sysvg pv.01     
logvol /var             --vgname=sysvg  --size=8000     --name=var 
logvol /var/freespace   --vgname=sysvg  --size=8000     --name=freespacetouse 
logvol /usr/local       --vgname=sysvg  --size=1 --grow --name=usrlocal
此​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ LVM 套​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.5. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ %packages 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​(這​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ variant/repodata/comps-*.xml 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ id、​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​註​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​;標​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​;非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Core 與​​​​​​​ Base 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ %packages 的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ %packages 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:
%packages 
@ X Window System 
@ GNOME Desktop Environment 
@ Graphical Internet 
@ Sound and Video dhcp
如​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​,套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,先​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ @ 符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​,再​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ comps.xml 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ID 來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ gnome-desktop,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dhcp 一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,便​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​:
-autofs
%packages 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​:
--nobase
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ @Base 群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
--resolvedeps
--resolvedeps 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
--ignoredeps
--ignoredeps 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
--ignoremissing
在​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​暫​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,便​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​遺​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
%packages --ignoremissing

28.6. 前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ ks.cfg 語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ %pre 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ %pre 存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ name service,您​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
--interpreter /usr/bin/python
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ Python,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ /usr/bin/python。​​​​​​​

28.6.1. 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​

這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ %pre 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
%pre  
#!/bin/sh  
hds="" 
mymedia=""  
for file in /proc/ide/h* do   
	mymedia=`cat $file/media`   
	if [ $mymedia == "disk" ] ; then       
		hds="$hds `basename $file`"   
	fi 
done  
set $hds 
numhd=`echo $#`  
drive1=`echo $hds | cut -d' ' -f1` 
drive2=`echo $hds | cut -d' ' -f2`  
#Write out partition scheme based on whether there are 1 or 2 hard drives  
if [ $numhd == "2" ] ; then   
	#2 drives   
	echo "#partitioning scheme generated in %pre for 2 drives" > /tmp/part-include   
	echo "clearpart --all" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part /boot --fstype ext3 --size 75 --ondisk hda" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part / --fstype ext3 --size 1 --grow --ondisk hda" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part swap --recommended --ondisk $drive1" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part /home --fstype ext3 --size 1 --grow --ondisk hdb" >> /tmp/part-include 
else   
	#1 drive   
	echo "#partitioning scheme generated in %pre for 1 drive" > /tmp/part-include   
	echo "clearpart --all" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part /boot --fstype ext3 --size 75" >> /tmp/part-includ   
	echo "part swap --recommended" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part / --fstype ext3 --size 2048" >> /tmp/part-include   
	echo "part /home --fstype ext3 --size 2048 --grow" >> /tmp/part-include 
fi
這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​:
%include /tmp/part-include
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ script 中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

kickstart 的​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ script 無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​ 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ks.cfg 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ script 能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.7. 後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ %post 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​頭​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​靜​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​(含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ %post 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP,當​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ %post 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,/etc/resolv.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ DHCP,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ %post 部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ script 會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​ script 或​​​​​​​ RPM 之​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
--nochroot
使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​ /etc/resolv.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​剛​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
%post --nochroot cp /etc/resolv.conf /mnt/sysimage/etc/resolv.conf
--interpreter /usr/bin/python
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ Python,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ /usr/bin/python。​​​​​​​

28.7.1. 範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​

將​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ Red Hat 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​衛​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​:
%post
( # Note that in this example we run the entire %post section as a subshell for logging.
wget -O- http://proxy-or-sat.example.com/pub/bootstrap_script | /bin/bash
/usr/sbin/rhnreg_ks --activationkey=<activationkey>
# End the subshell and capture any output to a post-install log file.
) 1>/root/post_install.log 2>&1
從​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ runme 的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​:
mkdir /mnt/temp 
mount -o nolock 10.10.0.2:/usr/new-machines /mnt/temp open -s -w -- 
/mnt/temp/runme 
umount /mnt/temp

注意

Kickstart 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ NFS 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​鎖​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ NFS 時​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ -o nolock。​​​​​​​

28.8. 使​​​​​​​ Kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​

kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
  • 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​
  • 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​
  • 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​仔​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.8.1. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ Kickstart 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​

Diskette-based booting is no longer supported in Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Installations must use CD-ROM or flash memory products for booting. However, the kickstart file may still reside on a diskette's top-level directory, and must be named ks.cfg.
To perform a CD-ROM-based kickstart installation, the kickstart file must be named ks.cfg and must be located in the boot CD-ROM's top-level directory. Since a CD-ROM is read-only, the file must be added to the directory used to create the image that is written to the CD-ROM. Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide for instructions on creating boot media; however, before making the file.iso image file, copy the ks.cfg kickstart file to the isolinux/ directory.
To perform a pen-based flash memory kickstart installation, the kickstart file must be named ks.cfg and must be located in the flash memory's top-level directory. Create the boot image first, and then copy the ks.cfg file.
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dd 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​(/dev/sda):
dd if=diskboot.img of=/dev/sda bs=1M

注意

您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​視​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ BIOS 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​詢​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.8.2. 使​​​​​​​ Kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ kickstart 的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​見​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ BOOTP/DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,BOOTP/DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,不​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
從​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ BOOTP/DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​BOOTP/DCHP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If a kickstart file is specified by the BOOTP/DHCP server, the client system attempts an NFS mount of the file's path, and copies the specified file to the client, using it as the kickstart file. The exact settings required vary depending on the BOOTP/DHCP server you use.
這​​​​​​​裡​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dhcpd.conf 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
filename "/usr/new-machine/kickstart/"; next-server blarg.redhat.com;
請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ kickstart 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ filename 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​),以​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ next-server 之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If the file name returned by the BOOTP/DHCP server ends with a slash ("/"), then it is interpreted as a path only. In this case, the client system mounts that path using NFS, and searches for a particular file. The file name the client searches for is:
<ip-addr>-kickstart
The <ip-addr> section of the file name should be replaced with the client's IP address in dotted decimal notation. For example, the file name for a computer with an IP address of 10.10.0.1 would be 10.10.0.1-kickstart.
Note that if you do not specify a server name, then the client system attempts to use the server that answered the BOOTP/DHCP request as its NFS server. If you do not specify a path or file name, the client system tries to mount /kickstart from the BOOTP/DHCP server and tries to find the kickstart file using the same <ip-addr>-kickstart file name as described above.

28.9. 使​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​

Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​ (installation tree)。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​擁​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 置​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP)安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​,詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

28.10. 開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

欲​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ ks 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
CD-ROM #1 與​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​
The linux ks=floppy command also works if the ks.cfg file is located on a vfat or ext2 file system on a diskette and you boot from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1.
另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM #1 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ vfat 或​​​​​​​ ext2 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
linux ks=hd:fd0:/ks.cfg
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ dd 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 舉​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
linux ks=floppy dd
開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
If the kickstart file is on a boot CD-ROM as described in 節 28.8.1, “建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ Kickstart 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​”, insert the CD-ROM into the system, boot the system, and enter the following command at the boot: prompt (where ks.cfg is the name of the kickstart file):
linux ks=cdrom:/ks.cfg
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
askmethod
請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
autostep
將​​​​​​​ kickstart 設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
debug
立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ pdb。​​​​​​​
dd
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
dhcpclass=<class>
Sends a custom DHCP vendor class identifier. ISC's dhcpcd can inspect this value using "option vendor-class-identifier".
dns=<dns>
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
driverdisk
Same as 'dd'.
expert
特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​
  • 驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​
gateway=<gw>
用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​閘​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
graphical
強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ ftp/http 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GUI。​​​​​​​
isa
提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ ISA 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
ip=<ip>
IP to use for a network installation, use 'dhcp' for DHCP.
keymap=<keymap>
Keyboard layout to use. Valid values are those which can be used for the 'keyboard' kickstart command.
ks=nfs:<server>:/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on the NFS server <server>, as file <path>. The installation program uses DHCP to configure the Ethernet card. For example, if your NFS server is server.example.com and the kickstart file is in the NFS share /mydir/ks.cfg, the correct boot command would be ks=nfs:server.example.com:/mydir/ks.cfg.
ks=http://<server>/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on the HTTP server <server>, as file <path>. The installation program uses DHCP to configure the Ethernet card. For example, if your HTTP server is server.example.com and the kickstart file is in the HTTP directory /mydir/ks.cfg, the correct boot command would be ks=http://server.example.com/mydir/ks.cfg.
ks=floppy
安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /dev/fd0 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ vfat 或​​​​​​​ ext2 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​ ks.cfg 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
ks=floppy:/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on the diskette in /dev/fd0, as file <path>.
ks=hd:<device>:/<file>
The installation program mounts the file system on <device> (which must be vfat or ext2), and look for the kickstart configuration file as <file> in that file system (for example, ks=hd:sda3:/mydir/ks.cfg).
ks=file:/<file>
The installation program tries to read the file <file> from the file system; no mounts are done. This is normally used if the kickstart file is already on the initrd image.
ks=cdrom:/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on CD-ROM, as file <path>.
ks
If ks is used alone, the installation program configures the Ethernet card to use DHCP. The kickstart file is read from the "bootServer" from the DHCP response as if it is an NFS server sharing the kickstart file. By default, the bootServer is the same as the DHCP server. The name of the kickstart file is one of the following:
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ DHCP 且​​​​​​​ boot 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /,則​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ DHCP 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ DHCP 且​​​​​​​ boot檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ /,則​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /kickstart 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ DHCP 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ boot 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ DHCP 沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ boot 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ /kickstart/1.2.3.4-kickstart1.2.3.4 為​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
ksdevice=<device>
The installation program uses this network device to connect to the network. For example, consider a system connected to an NFS server through the eth1 device. To perform a kickstart installation on this system using a kickstart file from the NFS server, you would use the command ks=nfs:<server>:/<path> ksdevice=eth1 at the boot: prompt.
kssendmac
Adds HTTP headers to ks=http:// request that can be helpful for provisioning systems. Includes MAC address of all nics in CGI environment variables of the form: "X-RHN-Provisioning-MAC-0: eth0 01:23:45:67:89:ab".
lang=<lang>
Language to use for the installation. This should be a language which is valid to be used with the 'lang' kickstart command.
loglevel=<level>
Set the minimum level required for messages to be logged. Values for <level> are debug, info, warning, error, and critical. The default value is info.
lowres
強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​ GUI 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 640x480 下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck
啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,讓​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ ISO 方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
method=cdrom
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CDROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​
method=ftp://<path>
Use <path> for an FTP installation.
method=hd:<device>:<path>
Use <path> on <dev> for a hard drive installation.
method=http://<path>
Use <path> for an HTTP installation.
method=nfs:<path>
Use <path> for an NFS installation.
netmask=<nm>
網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​遮​​​​​​​罩​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nofallback
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ GUI。​​​​​​​
nofb
在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ VGA16 幀​​​​​​​幅​​​​​​​緩​​​​​​​衝​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​(framebuffer)。​​​​​​​
nofirewire
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​
noipv6
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ IPv6 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nokill
在​​​​​​​嚴​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​ anaconda 終​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nomount
Don't automatically mount any installed Linux partitions in rescue mode.
nonet
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noparport
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nopass
Don't pass keyboard/mouse info to stage 2 installer, good for testing keyboard and mouse config screens in stage2 installer during network installs.
nopcmcia
在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noprobe
除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​試​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​ hw。​​​​​​​
noshell
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ shell 放​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ tty2。​​​​​​​
nostorage
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(SCSI、​​​​​​​IDE 或​​​​​​​ RAID)。​​​​​​​
nousb
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ USB 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
nousbstorage
請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ usbstorage 模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ SCSI 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
rescue
執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​
resolution=<mode>
Run installer in mode specified, '1024x768' for example.
serial
開​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
skipddc
Skips DDC probe of monitor, may help if it's hanging system.
syslog=<host>[:<port>]
Once installation is up and running, send log messages to the syslog process on <host>, and optionally, on port <port>. Requires the remote syslog process to accept connections (the -r option).
text
強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates
提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates=ftp://<path>
在​​​​​​​ FTP 上​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates=http://<path>
在​​​​​​​ HTTP 上​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
upgradeany
Don't require an /etc/redhat-release that matches the expected syntax to upgrade.
vnc
啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ vnc 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ vnc 用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vncconnect=<host>[:<port>]
Once installation is up and running, connect to the vnc client named <host>, and optionally use port <port>.
Requires 'vnc' option to be specified as well.
vncpassword=<password>
磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​ vnc 連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ vnc 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Requires 'vnc' option to be specified as well.

章 29. Kickstart Configurator

Kickstart 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To use Kickstart Configurator, you must be running the X Window System. To start Kickstart Configurator, select Applications (the main menu on the panel) => System Tools => Kickstart, or type the command /usr/sbin/system-config-kickstart.
As you are creating a kickstart file, you can select File => Preview at any time to review your current selections.
To start with an existing kickstart file, select File => Open and select the existing file.

29.1. Basic Configuration

Basic Configuration

圖形 29.1. Basic Configuration

於​​​​​​​ 預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ 鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ 時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC 請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC 時​​​​​​​鐘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ Root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​ root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 將​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​純​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​閱​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​純​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​覽​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.2. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

圖形 29.2. 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​,分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ kickstart 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
  • CD-ROM — 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROM 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • NFS — 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ NFS 分​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ NFS 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ variant 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​ NFS 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/RedHat/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​ NFS 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/。​​​​​​​
  • FTP — 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ RedHat 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FTP 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​ FTP 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ FTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • HTTP — 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​,輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ RedHat 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​ HTTP 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/。​​​​​​​
  • 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​ — 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO (或​​​​​​​ CD-ROM)映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​壞​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​狀​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ linux mediacheck 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/dev/hda1)的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.3. Boot Loader Options

Boot Loader Options

圖形 29.3. Boot Loader Options

請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ x86 / x86_64.之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB 為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 / x86_64 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​希​​​​​​​望​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​廠​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​紀​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​ 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ IDE CD-ROM 燒​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SCSI 模​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cdrecord 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ hdd=ide-scsi 為​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​(hdd 為​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​護​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 欄​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​ GRUB 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 頁​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 已​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

升​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 上​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,此​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.4. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

圖形 29.4. 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ MBR,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ x86 為​​​​​​​ msdos 與​​​​​​​ Itanium 為​​​​​​​ gpt)架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​籤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

雖​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​ anaconda 與​​​​​​​ kickstart 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​邏​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​(LVM),但​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ Kickstart 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​.尚​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.4.1. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

To create a partition, click the Add button. The Partition Options window shown in 圖形 29.5, “建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​” appears. Choose the mount point, file system type, and partition size for the new partition. Optionally, you can also choose from the following:
  • 在​​​​​​​ 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​固​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​滿​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ swap,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ swap 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 在​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​(/dev/hda),指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ hda 為​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ /dev 包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​(/dev/hda1)建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ hda1 為​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​勿​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ /dev 包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

圖形 29.5. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

To edit an existing partition, select the partition from the list and click the Edit button. The same Partition Options window appears as when you chose to add a partition as shown in 圖形 29.5, “建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​”, except it reflects the values for the selected partition. Modify the partition options and click OK.
欲​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,從​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.4.1.1. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ RAID 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 為​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

圖形 29.6. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​

重​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ RAID 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 再​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​RAID 等​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​RAID 成​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,還​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

    圖形 29.7. 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​軟​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​ RAID 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

  4. 點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.5. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 29.8. 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 頁​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​(NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP)才​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​隨​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​system-config-network)來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ eth0 來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,eth1來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.6. 認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​

認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​

圖形 29.9. 認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ 認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ shadow password(隱​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​議​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • NIS
  • LDAP
  • Kerberos 5
  • Hesiod
  • SMB
  • 名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 旁​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​證​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.7. 防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

圖形 29.10. 防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​ 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​拒​​​​​​​絕​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​ 沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ DNS 回​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ DHCP 要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​ 務​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
唯​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ eth1 只​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 信​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​ 清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​線​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​ 的​​​​​​​欄​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​:通​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​ IMAP 通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ imap:tcp。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​;譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​ 1234 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ UDP 封​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​防​​​​​​​火​​​​​​​牆​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ 1234:udp。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.7.1. SELinux 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

Kickstart 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​ SELinux 設​​​​​​​ 為​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​, 許​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​ 或​​​​​​​ 停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​精​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.8. 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

If you are installing the X Window System, you can configure it during the kickstart installation by checking the Configure the X Window System option on the Display Configuration window as shown in 圖形 29.11, “X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​”. If this option is not chosen, the X configuration options are disabled and the skipx option is written to the kickstart file.

29.8.1. 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​

設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ X 的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​彩​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​拉​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​彩​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​

圖形 29.11. X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ GNOME 與​​​​​​​ KDE 桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 5 的​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​滑​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​盤​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​root 密​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.8.2. 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​

顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​ 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Alternatively, you can select the video card driver from the list on the Video Card tab as shown in 圖形 29.12, “X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​”. Specify the amount of video RAM the selected video card has from the Video Card RAM pulldown menu. These values are used by the installation program to configure the X Window System.
X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​

圖形 29.12. X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​

29.8.3. 螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​

X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​

圖形 29.13. X 組​​​​​​​態​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ - 螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​

偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​偵​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​繼​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​橫​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​縱​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​ sync 比​​​​​​​率​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​勾​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ hsync 與​​​​​​​ vsync 而​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,當​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.9. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​

套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​

圖形 29.14. 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​

套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​群​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Currently, Kickstart Configurator does not allow you to select individual packages. To install individual packages, modify the %packages section of the kickstart file after you save it. Refer to 節 28.5, “套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​” for details.

29.10. 前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

圖形 29.15. 前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​析​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ script 的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​譯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​旁​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​譯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /usr/bin/python2.4 可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ Python script。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ %pre --interpreter /usr/bin/python2.4 一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​ busybox 叫​​​​​​​ busybox-anaconda 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ Busybox 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ busybox 所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
addgroup, adduser, adjtimex, ar, arping, ash, awk, basename, bbconfig, bunzip2, busybox, bzcat, cal, cat, catv, chattr, chgrp, chmod, chown, chroot, chvt, cksum, clear, cmp, comm, cp, cpio, crond, crontab, cut, date, dc, dd, deallocvt, delgroup, deluser, devfsd, df, diff, dirname, dmesg, dnsd, dos2unix, dpkg, dpkg-deb, du, dumpkmap, dumpleases, e2fsck, e2label, echo, ed, egrep, eject, env, ether-wake, expr, fakeidentd, false, fbset, fdflush, fdformat, fdisk, fgrep, find, findfs, fold, free, freeramdisk, fsck, fsck.ext2, fsck.ext3, fsck.minix, ftpget, ftpput, fuser, getopt, getty, grep, gunzip, gzip, hdparm, head, hexdump, hostid, hostname, httpd, hush, hwclock, id, ifconfig, ifdown, ifup, inetd, insmod, install, ip, ipaddr, ipcalc, ipcrm, ipcs, iplink, iproute, iptunnel, kill, killall, lash, last, length, less, linux32, linux64, ln, load_policy, loadfont, loadkmap, login, logname, losetup, ls, lsattr, lsmod, lzmacat, makedevs, md5sum, mdev, mesg, mkdir, mke2fs, mkfifo, mkfs.ext2, mkfs.ext3, mkfs.minix, mknod, mkswap, mktemp, modprobe, more, mount, mountpoint, msh, mt, mv, nameif, nc, netstat, nice, nohup, nslookup, od, openvt, passwd, patch, pidof, ping, ping6, pipe_progress, pivot_root, printenv, printf, ps, pwd, rdate, readlink, readprofile, realpath, renice, reset, rm, rmdir, rmmod, route, rpm, rpm2cpio, run-parts, runlevel, rx, sed, seq, setarch, setconsole, setkeycodes, setlogcons, setsid, sh, sha1sum, sleep, sort, start-stop-daemon, stat, strings, stty, su, sulogin, sum, swapoff, swapon, switch_root, sync, sysctl, tail, tar, tee, telnet, telnetd, test, tftp, time, top, touch, tr, traceroute, true, tty, tune2fs, udhcpc, udhcpd, umount, uname, uncompress, uniq, unix2dos, unlzma, unzip, uptime, usleep, uudecode, uuencode, vconfig, vi, vlock, watch, watchdog, wc, wget, which, who, whoami, xargs, yes, zcat, zcip
部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ busybox 所​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
anaconda bash bzip2 jmacs ftp head joe kudzu-probe list-harddrives loadkeys mtools mbchk mtools mini-wm mtools jpico pump python python2.4 raidstart raidstop rcp rlogin rsync setxkbmap sftp shred ssh syslinux syslogd tac termidx vncconfig vncpasswd xkbcomp Xorg Xvnc zcat

警告

請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ %pre 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ script 才​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ script 下​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.11. 後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

圖形 29.16. 後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​

您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,此​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 如​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​續​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

請​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​ %post 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ %post 中​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
echo "Hackers will be punished!" > /etc/motd

29.11.1. Chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ script,請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​ 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​旁​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​勾​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ %post 下​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ --nochroot 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
欲​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​ prepend 一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /mnt/sysimage/ 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​拰​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​ 在​​​​​​​ chroot 環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
echo "Hackers will be punished!" > /mnt/sysimage/etc/motd

29.11.2. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​譯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​

指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ script 的​​​​​​​語​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​譯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​塊​​​​​​​旁​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​譯​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /usr/bin/python2.4 可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ Python script。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kickstart 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ %pre --interpreter /usr/bin/python2.4 一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

29.12. 儲​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​

To review the contents of the kickstart file after you have finished choosing your kickstart options, select File => Preview from the pull-down menu.
Preview

圖形 29.17. Preview

To save the kickstart file, click the Save to File button in the preview window. To save the file without previewing it, select File => Save File or press Ctrl+S . A dialog box appears. Select where to save the file.
After saving the file, refer to 節 28.10, “開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ Kickstart 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​” for information on how to start the kickstart installation.

章 30. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​init 與​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​強​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​種​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​變​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​鮮​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
正​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​讓​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,更​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​問​​​​​​​題​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​礙​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.1. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​

下​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​:
  1. 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ BIOS 會​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR 啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​ /sbin/init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  5. /sbin/init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/fstab 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  6. 對​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​,螢​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​普​​​​​​​遍​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​針​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.2. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​

開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​針​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​ x86 電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​討​​​​​​​論​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.2.1. BIOS

當​​​​​​​ x86 電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​ Input/Output 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ 或​​​​​​​ BIOS 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​BIOS 並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​僅​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,同​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​週​​​​​​​邊​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​駐​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​隨​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​,這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​ Itanium 為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Extensible Firmware InterfaceEFIShell。​​​​​​​
Once loaded, the BIOS tests the system, looks for and checks peripherals, and then locates a valid device with which to boot the system. Usually, it checks any diskette drives and CD-ROM drives present for bootable media, then, failing that, looks to the system's hard drives. In most cases, the order of the drives searched while booting is controlled with a setting in the BIOS, and it looks on the master IDE device on the primary IDE bus. The BIOS then loads into memory whatever program is residing in the first sector of this device, called the Master Boot Record or MBR. The MBR is only 512 bytes in size and contains machine code instructions for booting the machine, called a boot loader, along with the partition table. Once the BIOS finds and loads the boot loader program into memory, it yields control of the boot process to it.

30.2.2. 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

x86 平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​碼​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB has the advantage of being able to read ext2 and ext3 [13] partitions and load its configuration file — /boot/grub/grub.conf — at boot time. Refer to 節 9.7, “GRUB選​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​” for information on how to edit this file.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Red Hat 更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ Red Hat 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​ https://rhn.redhat.com/。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​階​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​鍵​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ Enter。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​擇​​​​​​​,則​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​間​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Once the second stage boot loader has determined which kernel to boot, it locates the corresponding kernel binary in the /boot/ directory. The kernel binary is named using the following format — /boot/vmlinuz-<kernel-version> file (where <kernel-version> corresponds to the kernel version specified in the boot loader's settings).
For instructions on using the boot loader to supply command line arguments to the kernel, refer to 章 9, GRUB 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​. For information on changing the runlevel at the boot loader prompt, refer 節 9.8, “Changing Runlevels at Boot Time”.
開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ initramfs 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​壓​​​​​​​縮​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ /boot/,一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​ cpio 以​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​虛​​​​​​​擬​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ initramfs 載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驅​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​組​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ext3 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​ initramfs 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​權​​​​​​​轉​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​給​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.2.2.1. 在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

Once the kernel loads and hands off the boot process to the init command, the same sequence of events occurs on every architecture. So the main difference between each architecture's boot process is in the application used to find and load the kernel.
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,Itanium 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ELILO 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,IBM eServer pSeries 架​​​​​​​構​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ yaboot,而​​​​​​​ IBM System z系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ z/IPL 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.2.3. 核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​

When the kernel is loaded, it immediately initializes and configures the computer's memory and configures the various hardware attached to the system, including all processors, I/O subsystems, and storage devices. It then looks for the compressed initramfs image(s) in a predetermined location in memory, decompresses it directly to /sysroot/, and loads all necessary drivers. Next, it initializes virtual devices related to the file system, such as LVM or software RAID, before completing the initramfs processes and freeing up all the memory the disk image once occupied.
接​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ root 裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​ root 分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​獨​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
這​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​記​​​​​​​憶​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,由​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​應​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ /sbin/init程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.2.4. /sbin/init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

/sbin/init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(亦​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​ init)協​​​​​​​調​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​餘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
當​​​​​​​ init 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​過​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​親​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit script,這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ script 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​徑​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​(starts wap)、​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​,和​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​採​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​(clock),所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ rc.sysinit 能​​​​​​​讀​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/clock 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​埠​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​ rc.sysinit 會​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.serial 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
The init command then runs the /etc/inittab script, which describes how the system should be set up in each SysV init runlevel. Runlevels are a state, or mode, defined by the services listed in the SysV /etc/rc.d/rc<x>.d/ directory, where <x> is the number of the runlevel. For more information on SysV init runlevels, refer to 節 30.4, “SysV Init 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​”.
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​,init 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​館​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/init.d/functions,這​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ PID。​​​​​​​
init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​適​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rc 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​,尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ runlevel,以​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​背​​​​​​​景​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​rc 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ runlevel 來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ 是​​​​​​​ runlevel 5 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ runlevel 5 時​​​​​​​,init 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​:
K05innd -> ../init.d/innd 
K05saslauthd -> ../init.d/saslauthd 
K10dc_server -> ../init.d/dc_server 
K10psacct -> ../init.d/psacct 
K10radiusd -> ../init.d/radiusd 
K12dc_client -> ../init.d/dc_client 
K12FreeWnn -> ../init.d/FreeWnn 
K12mailman -> ../init.d/mailman 
K12mysqld -> ../init.d/mysqld 
K15httpd -> ../init.d/httpd 
K20netdump-server -> ../init.d/netdump-server 
K20rstatd -> ../init.d/rstatd 
K20rusersd -> ../init.d/rusersd 
K20rwhod -> ../init.d/rwhod 
K24irda -> ../init.d/irda 
K25squid -> ../init.d/squid 
K28amd -> ../init.d/amd 
K30spamassassin -> ../init.d/spamassassin 
K34dhcrelay -> ../init.d/dhcrelay 
K34yppasswdd -> ../init.d/yppasswdd 
K35dhcpd -> ../init.d/dhcpd 
K35smb -> ../init.d/smb 
K35vncserver -> ../init.d/vncserver 
K36lisa -> ../init.d/lisa 
K45arpwatch -> ../init.d/arpwatch 
K45named -> ../init.d/named 
K46radvd -> ../init.d/radvd 
K50netdump -> ../init.d/netdump 
K50snmpd -> ../init.d/snmpd 
K50snmptrapd -> ../init.d/snmptrapd 
K50tux -> ../init.d/tux 
K50vsftpd -> ../init.d/vsftpd 
K54dovecot -> ../init.d/dovecot 
K61ldap -> ../init.d/ldap 
K65kadmin -> ../init.d/kadmin 
K65kprop -> ../init.d/kprop 
K65krb524 -> ../init.d/krb524 
K65krb5kdc -> ../init.d/krb5kdc 
K70aep1000 -> ../init.d/aep1000 
K70bcm5820 -> ../init.d/bcm5820 
K74ypserv -> ../init.d/ypserv 
K74ypxfrd -> ../init.d/ypxfrd 
K85mdmpd -> ../init.d/mdmpd 
K89netplugd -> ../init.d/netplugd 
K99microcode_ctl -> ../init.d/microcode_ctl 
S04readahead_early -> ../init.d/readahead_early 
S05kudzu -> ../init.d/kudzu 
S06cpuspeed -> ../init.d/cpuspeed 
S08ip6tables -> ../init.d/ip6tables 
S08iptables -> ../init.d/iptables 
S09isdn -> ../init.d/isdn 
S10network -> ../init.d/network 
S12syslog -> ../init.d/syslog 
S13irqbalance -> ../init.d/irqbalance 
S13portmap -> ../init.d/portmap 
S15mdmonitor -> ../init.d/mdmonitor 
S15zebra -> ../init.d/zebra 
S16bgpd -> ../init.d/bgpd 
S16ospf6d -> ../init.d/ospf6d 
S16ospfd -> ../init.d/ospfd 
S16ripd -> ../init.d/ripd 
S16ripngd -> ../init.d/ripngd 
S20random -> ../init.d/random 
S24pcmcia -> ../init.d/pcmcia 
S25netfs -> ../init.d/netfs 
S26apmd -> ../init.d/apmd 
S27ypbind -> ../init.d/ypbind 
S28autofs -> ../init.d/autofs 
S40smartd -> ../init.d/smartd 
S44acpid -> ../init.d/acpid 
S54hpoj -> ../init.d/hpoj 
S55cups -> ../init.d/cups 
S55sshd -> ../init.d/sshd 
S56rawdevices -> ../init.d/rawdevices 
S56xinetd -> ../init.d/xinetd 
S58ntpd -> ../init.d/ntpd 
S75postgresql -> ../init.d/postgresql 
S80sendmail -> ../init.d/sendmail 
S85gpm -> ../init.d/gpm 
S87iiim -> ../init.d/iiim 
S90canna -> ../init.d/canna 
S90crond -> ../init.d/crond 
S90xfs -> ../init.d/xfs 
S95atd -> ../init.d/atd 
S96readahead -> ../init.d/readahead 
S97messagebus -> ../init.d/messagebus 
S97rhnsd -> ../init.d/rhnsd 
S99local -> ../rc.local
如​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,沒​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ script 適​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ 的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ 符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​(symbolic links),用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/init.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ script。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ rc 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ symbolic links,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​響​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​際​​​​​​​ script 的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ symbloic links 來​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ runlevel。​​​​​​​
Symbolic link 會​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ K 或​​​​​​​ S 來​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​K 為​​​​​​​ runlevel 中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​刪​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​(killed)的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ S 則​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​(started)的​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
The init command first stops all of the K symbolic links in the directory by issuing the /etc/rc.d/init.d/<command> stop command, where <command> is the process to be killed. It then starts all of the S symbolic links by issuing /etc/rc.d/init.d/<command> start.

注意

在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ script 來​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd stop 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​ Apache HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ symbolic link 都​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​,會​​​​​​​越​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​樣​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Symbolic link 則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​英​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​順​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

One of the last things the init program executes is the /etc/rc.d/rc.local file. This file is useful for system customization. Refer to 節 30.3, “在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​” for more information about using the rc.local file.
After the init command has progressed through the appropriate rc directory for the runlevel, the /etc/inittab script forks an /sbin/mingetty process for each virtual console (login prompt) allocated to the runlevel. Runlevels 2 through 5 have all six virtual consoles, while runlevel 1 (single user mode) has one, and runlevels 0 and 6 have none. The /sbin/mingetty process opens communication pathways to tty devices[14], sets their modes, prints the login prompt, accepts the user's username and password, and initiates the login process.
在​​​​​​​ Runlevel 5,/etc/inittab 會​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ /etc/X11/prefdm 的​​​​​​​script。​​​​​​​prefdm script 會​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ /etc/sysconfig/desktop 檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​內​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ [15]gdm, kdm, or xdm。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ runlevel 5 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.3. 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

/etc/rc.d/rc.local script 在​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​ runlevel 時​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ init 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,比​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/init.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​寫​​​​​​​繁​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​script 和​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ symbolic link,在​​​​​​​ script 的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​則​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
The /etc/rc.serial script is used if serial ports must be setup at boot time. This script runs setserial commands to configure the system's serial ports. Refer to the setserial man page for more information.

30.4. SysV Init 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​

SysV init runlevel 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​標​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ runlevel 程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​ init 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SysV init 原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​傳​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ BSD 式​​​​​​​ init 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​富​​​​​​​彈​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
SysV init 的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ rc、​​​​​​​ rc.local、​​​​​​​rc.sysinit 和​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rc.serial scripts 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​:
init.d/ rc0.d/ rc1.d/ rc2.d/ rc3.d/ rc4.d/ rc5.d/ rc6.d/
init.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​ /sbin/init 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ scripts。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 由​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ runlevel。​​​​​​​

30.4.1. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​

SysV init runlevel 的​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​念​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​繞​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​觀​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ X 視​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​拖​​​​​​​緩​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​較​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ runlevel 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​檢​​​​​​​測​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ runlevel 1 修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Runlevel 的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ init 決​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ runlevel 1(單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​)在​​​​​​​ runlevel 3 啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​,將​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ runlevel 上​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​,init 能​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ runlevel 在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 下​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​:
  • 0 — 停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​
  • 1 — 單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 2 — 尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​)
  • 3 — 完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​
  • 4 — 尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​(使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​義​​​​​​​)
  • 5 — 完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ X 基​​​​​​​礎​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​畫​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​)
  • 6 — 重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​
基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ runlevel 3 或​​​​​​​ 5 — 下​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,都​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​ runlevel 2 和​​​​​​​ 4 尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​ runlevel 2 和​​​​​​​ 4。​​​​​​​
系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ runlevel 列​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab。​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ runlevel,請​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​尋​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 的​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​:
id:5:initdefault:
在​​​​​​​範​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​預​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​ runlevel 是​​​​​​​ 5,如​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​冒​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ root 身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 以​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​換​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

在​​​​​​​編​​​​​​​輯​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 時​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​錯​​​​​​​誤​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​會​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​況​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​該​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​ 基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​復​​​​​​​ 章​​​​​​​節​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
It is possible to change the default runlevel at boot time by modifying the arguments passed by the boot loader to the kernel. For information on changing the runlevel at boot time, refer to 節 9.8, “Changing Runlevels at Boot Time”.

30.4.2. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​(Runlevel)工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​

用​​​​​​​ initscript 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ runlevel 是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​計​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ SysV init 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​,和​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​員​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/ 的​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​數​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​號​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​(symbolic link)。​​​​​​​
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​:
  • /sbin/chkconfig/sbin/chkconfig 為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​簡​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​維​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​ /etc/rc.d/init.d/ 目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • /usr/sbin/ntsysv — ncurses-based 的​​​​​​​ /sbin/ntsysv 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,部​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​覺​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​比​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​ chkconfig 更​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ — 圖​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​)程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ runlevel 相​​​​​​​當​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​彈​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

30.5. 關​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​

關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux,root 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​發​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ /sbin/shutdown 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​shutdown man page 有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​兩​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​為​​​​​​​:
/sbin/shutdown -h now /sbin/shutdown -r now
在​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,-h 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​運​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​,-r 則​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ run level 1 到​​​​​​​ 5 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,PAM 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ reboot 和​​​​​​​ halt 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ PAM 主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​終​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​現​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​將​​​​​​​電​​​​​​​腦​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​閉​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​割​​​​​​​區​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​結​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​掛​​​​​​​載​​​​​​​,並​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​導​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​損​​​​​​​毀​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[13] GRUB reads ext3 file systems as ext2, disregarding the journal file. Refer to the chapter titled The ext3 File System in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for more information on the ext3 file system.
[14] Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for more information about tty devices.
[15] 更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​顯​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​

章 31. PXE 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 協​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​ USB 隨​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ askmethod 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​處​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​(PXE,Pre-Execution Environment)支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​(NIC),在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 光​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​類​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​媒​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​還​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For a PXE network installation, the client's NIC with PXE support sends out a broadcast request for DHCP information. The DHCP server provides the client with an IP address, other network information such as name server, the IP address or hostname of the tftp server (which provides the files necessary to start the installation program), and the location of the files on the tftp server. This is possible because of PXELINUX, which is part of the syslinux package.
必​​​​​​​須​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​驟​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ PXE 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​:
  1. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​(NFS, FTP, HTTP)伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​來​​​​​​​匯​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​錄​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 在​​​​​​​ tftp 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ PXE 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​許​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​ PXE 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ tftp 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​
  5. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ DHCP。​​​​​​​
  6. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.1. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​

首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​欲​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​教​​​​​​​學​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​ 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 準​​​​​​​備​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.2. PXE 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ tftp 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​tftp 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​與​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​樹​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ 來​​​​​​​複​​​​​​​製​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ PXE 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.2.1. 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

If the network server is not running X, the pxeos command line utility, which is part of the system-config-netboot package, can be used to configure the tftp server files as described in 節 31.4, “TFTPD”:
pxeos -a -i "<description>" -p <NFS|HTTP|FTP> -D 0 -s client.example.com \ 
-L <net-location> -k <kernel> -K <kickstart> <os-identifer>
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
  • -a — 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ OS 實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​經​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ PXE 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • -i "<description>" — Replace "<description>" with a description of the OS instance.
  • -p <NFS|HTTP|FTP> — Specify which of the NFS, FTP, or HTTP protocols to use for installation. Only one may be specified.
  • -D <0|1> — Specify "0" which indicates that it is not a diskless configuration since pxeos can be used to configure a diskless environment as well.
  • -s client.example.com — 在​​​​​​​ -s 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • -L <net-location> — Provide the location of the installation tree on that server after the -L option.
  • -k <kernel> — Provide the specific kernel version of the server installation tree for booting.
  • -K <kickstart> — Provide the location of the kickstart file, if available.
  • <os-identifer> — Specify the OS identifier, which is used as the directory name in the /tftpboot/linux-install/ directory.
If FTP is selected as the installation protocol and anonymous login is not available, specify a username and password for login, with the following options before <os-identifer> in the previous command:
-A 0 -u <username> -p <password>
更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​ pxeos 的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ pxeos man page。​​​​​​​

31.3. 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​ PXE 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​

After configuring the network server, the interface as shown in 圖形 31.1, “Add Hosts” is displayed.
Add Hosts

圖形 31.1. Add Hosts

The next step is to configure which hosts are allowed to connect to the PXE boot server. For the command line version of this step, refer to 節 31.3.1, “指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​ 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​點​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​ 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​ 按​​​​​​​鈕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Add a Host

圖形 31.2. Add a Host

請​​​​​​​輸​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​:
  • 主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​/子​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​ — IP 位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​條​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​連​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ PXE 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​進​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​ — 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​業​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​識​​​​​​​別​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​戶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​植​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​ 網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​對​​​​​​​話​​​​​​​ 所​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​實​​​​​​​體​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ — 這​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Kickstart File — The location of a kickstart file to use, such as http://server.example.com/kickstart/ks.cfg. This file can be created with the Kickstart Configurator. Refer to 章 29, Kickstart Configurator for details.
忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​ Snapshot 名​​​​​​​稱​​​​​​​ 與​​​​​​​ 乙​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​ 選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​無​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​碟​​​​​​​環​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.3.1. 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ X,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ system-config-netboot 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ pxeboot 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​,來​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​聯​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ PEX 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
pxeboot -a -K <kickstart> -O <os-identifier> -r <value> <host>
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​清​​​​​​​單​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​釋​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​:
  • -a — 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • -K <kickstart> — The location of the kickstart file, if available.
  • -O <os-identifier> — Specifies the operating system identifier as defined in 節 31.2, “PXE 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​”.
  • -r <value> — Specifies the ram disk size.
  • <host> — Specifies the IP address or hostname of the host to add.
更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ pxeboot 指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​選​​​​​​​項​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ pxeboot man page。​​​​​​​

31.4. TFTPD

31.4.1. 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​ tftp 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​

On the DHCP server, verify that the tftp-server package is installed with the command rpm -q tftp-server. If it is not installed, install it via Red Hat Network or the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROMs.

注意

更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​ RPM 套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​套​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
tftp 為​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​ xientd 的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
/sbin/chkconfig --level 345 xinetd on /sbin/chkconfig --level 345 tftp on
這​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ tftp 與​​​​​​​ xinetd 服​​​​​​​務​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​層​​​​​​​級​​​​​​​ 3, 4 和​​​​​​​ 5 啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​時​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​並​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​們​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.5. 設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​

請​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​ DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​尚​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ DHCP 伺​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​詳​​​​​​​細​​​​​​​資​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 建​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​請​​​​​​​確​​​​​​​認​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​檔​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ 系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​ PEX 開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​:
allow booting; allow bootp; class "pxeclients" { match if substring(option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 9) = "PXEClient"; next-server <server-ip>; filename "linux-install/pxelinux.0"; }
where the next-server <server-ip> should be replaced with the IP address of the tftp server.

31.6. 新​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​個​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​訂​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ /tftpboot/linux-install/msgs/boot.msg 來​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​訊​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

31.7. 執​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ PXE 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​關​​​​​​​於​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ PXE 支​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​從​​​​​​​網​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​開​​​​​​​機​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ NIC 所​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​說​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​張​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​設​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​統​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​夠​​​​​​​啟​​​​​​​動​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​後​​​​​​​,請​​​​​​​參​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​裝​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​冊​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

附錄 A. Revision History

修訂記錄
修訂 5.0-9.4002013-10-31Rüdiger Landmann
Rebuild with publican 4.0.0
修訂 5.0-92012-07-18Anthony Towns
Rebuild for Publican 3.0
修訂 5.0.0-20Wed Feb 07 2007Michael Hideo Smith
Resolves: #223810
Fix complete. English only
修訂 5.0.0-17Thu Jan 23 2007Michael Hideo Smith
Resolves: #223924
Translation Build Chain Development
修訂 5.0.0-15Thu Jan 18 2007Jeff Fearn
Resolves: #222997
Fix Repeated entries in change log
修訂 5.0.0-14Thu Jan 9 2007Michael Hideo Smith
Resolves: #221247
Fix to broken rpm
修訂 5.0.0-13Thu Jan 04 2007Michael Hideo Smith
Resolves: #221247
Fix to broken rpm
修訂 5.0.0-12Thu Dec 21 2006Michael Hideo Smith
Resolves: #218359
Includes translations and content revisions.

法律聲明

Copyright © 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
This document is licensed by Red Hat under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License. If you distribute this document, or a modified version of it, you must provide attribution to Red Hat, Inc. and provide a link to the original. If the document is modified, all Red Hat trademarks must be removed.
Red Hat, as the licensor of this document, waives the right to enforce, and agrees not to assert, Section 4d of CC-BY-SA to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.
Red Hat, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the Shadowman logo, the Red Hat logo, JBoss, OpenShift, Fedora, the Infinity logo, and RHCE are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Linux® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
Java® is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
XFS® is a trademark of Silicon Graphics International Corp. or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
MySQL® is a registered trademark of MySQL AB in the United States, the European Union and other countries.
Node.js® is an official trademark of Joyent. Red Hat is not formally related to or endorsed by the official Joyent Node.js open source or commercial project.
The OpenStack® Word Mark and OpenStack logo are either registered trademarks/service marks or trademarks/service marks of the OpenStack Foundation, in the United States and other countries and are used with the OpenStack Foundation's permission. We are not affiliated with, endorsed or sponsored by the OpenStack Foundation, or the OpenStack community.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.